Marantz SR7009 User Manual To The 65e3eb68 56b0 4a88 Bc89 1229547d892b

65e3eb68-56b0-4a88-b.. 65e3eb68-56b0-4a88-bc89-1229547d892b

User Manual: Marantz SR7009 to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 357

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

AV Surround Receiver

SR7009

You can print more than one page of a PDF onto a single sheet of paper.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Owner’s Manual
Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings
8
9
9
10
10
11
14
15
15
20
24
27

Accessories
Inserting the batteries
Operating range of the remote control unit
Features
High quality sound
High performance
Easy operation
Part names and functions
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
Remote control unit

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

Connecting a playback device
Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)
Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player
Connecting a video camcorder or game console
Connecting a turntable
Connecting a device with a multi-channel output connector
Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port
Connecting an HD radio receiver
Connecting to a home network (LAN)
Wired LAN
Wireless LAN
Connecting an external control device
REMOTE CONTROL jacks
DC OUT jacks
Connecting the power cord

Connections
Connecting speakers
Speaker installation
Speaker connection
Speaker configuration and “Amp Assign” settings
Connecting a TV
Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and
compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel)
Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and
incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel)
Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector

Tips

32
32
39
42
59
60
61
62

Remote

Index

63
64
65
66
67
68
69
71
73
73
74
75
75
76
77

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Playback

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

Listening to an HD Radio™ stations
Listening to an HD Radio broadcast
Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)
Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)
Selecting an audio program
Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto
Preset Memory)
Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory)
Listening to preset stations
Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name)
Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)
Cancelling Preset Skip
Checking the HD Radio reception information
Listening to Internet Radio
Listening to Internet Radio
Playing the last played Internet Radio station
Using vTuner to add Internet Radio stations to favorites
Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS
Applying media sharing settings
Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS

79
79
79
80
80
80
81
82
83
85
85
86
87
89
90
91
93

Basic operation
Turning the power on
Selecting the input source
Adjusting the volume
Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)
Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player
Playing an iPod
Listening to music on an iPod
iPod Browse Mode settings
Performing repeat playback
Performing random playback
Playing a USB memory device
Playing files stored on USB memory devices
Listening to music on a Bluetooth device
Pairing with a Bluetooth device
Playing a Bluetooth device
Pairing with the Pairing Mode

Tips

Remote

Index

94
96
98
98
99
99
100
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111

Contents

Connections

Playback

Viewing photographs on the Flickr site
Viewing photographs shared by particular users
Viewing all photographs on Flickr
Listening to Pandora®
Listening to Pandora®
Creating a new station
Listening to an existing station
Listening to created radio stations at random
Giving feedback and managing stations
Sign Out
Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio
Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio
Sign Out
AirPlay function
Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad
Playing iTunes music with this unit
Selecting multiple speakers (devices)
Perform iTunes playback operations with the remote control unit
of this unit
Spotify Connect function
Playing Spotify music with this unit

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Settings
113
114
116
117
118
120
121
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
128
129

Tips

Appendix

Convenience functions
Performing repeat playback
Performing random playback
Registering to Favorites
Playing back content added to the “Save to Favorites”
Deleting content added to favorites
Searching content with keywords (Text Search)
Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time
(Slideshow)
Setting the Slideshow Interval
Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog Enhancer)
Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)
Adjusting the tone (Tone)
Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)
Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode)
Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)

129
130
130

Remote

Index

131
132
132
133
133
134
134
135
136
136
137
138
139
140
141

Contents

Connections

Playback

Selecting a sound mode
Selecting a sound mode
Direct playback
Pure Direct playback
Auto surround playback
HDMI control function
Setting procedure
Sleep timer function
Using the sleep timer
Smart select function
Calling up the settings
Changing the settings
Web control function
Controlling the unit from a web control
Panel lock function
Disabling all key button operations
Disabling all button operations except VOLUME
Canceling the Panel lock function
Remote lock function
Disabling the sensor function of the remote control unit
Enabling the remote sensor function
Switches light illumination on/off
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room)
Connecting ZONE
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Settings

142
143
144
144
145
156
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
162
164
164
164
165
166
166
166
167
168
168
173

175
178
179
180
181
181
181
182
185
186
186
187
191
193
193
195
199
203
204
205

Menu map
Menu operations
Inputting characters
Using the keyboard screen
Audio
Dialog Level Adjust
Subwoofer Level Adjust
Surround Parameter
M-DAX
Audio Delay
Volume
Audyssey
Graphic EQ
Video
Picture Adjust
HDMI Setup
Output Settings
Component Video Out
On Screen Display
TV Format

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback
206
206
208
208
208
209
210
210
212
218
220
221
221
236
240
241
242
243
244
244

Inputs
Input Assign
Source Rename
Hide Sources
Source Level
Input Select
Speakers
Audyssey® Setup
Procedure for speaker settings (Audyssey® Setup)
Error messages
Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings
Manual Setup
Amp Assign
Speaker Config.
Distances
Levels
Crossovers
Bass
Front Speaker
2ch Playback

Front panel

Display

Settings

Rear panel

Tips

247
247
247
248
250
251
252
252
253
254
254
254
256
258
258
258
259
259
261
262
264

Network
Information
Connection
Wi-Fi Setup
Settings
IP Control
Friendly Name
Diagnostics
Maintenance Mode
General
Language
ECO
ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup
Zone Rename
Smart Select Names
Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2
Front Display
Information
Usage Data
Firmware
Setup Lock

Remote

Appendix

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Operating external devices with the remote control unit
Registering preset codes
Operating devices
Check the registered preset code
Initializing registered preset codes
Operating learn function
Remembering remote control codes from other devices
Delete saved remote control codes
Setting the back light
Disabling the backlight
Turning the backlight on
Specifying the zone used with the remote control unit

Settings

Front panel

About HDMI
Video conversion function
Playing back a USB memory devices
Playing back a Bluetooth device
Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS
Playing back Internet Radio
Personal memory plus function
Last function memory
Sound modes and channel output
Sound modes and surround parameters
Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes
Explanation of terms
Trademark information
Specifications
Index
List of preset codes
License

279
281
299

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

265
266
269
272
272
273
274
275
276
276
276
277

Tips
Tips
Troubleshooting
Resetting factory settings

Tips

Remote

Index

300
303
305
306
307
308
308
308
309
311
314
317
328
330
336
339
350

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Thank you for purchasing this Marantz product.
To ensure proper operation, please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the product.
After reading this manual, be sure to keep it for future reference.

Accessories

Power cord

FM indoor antenna

Remote control unit
(RC026SR)

R03/AAA batteries

Front panel

Sound calibration
microphone stand

Display

Rear panel

External antennas for
Bluetooth/wireless
connectivity

Remote

Warranty
(for USA/for CANADA)

AM loop antenna

Cable labels

Notes on radio

Safety Instructions

CD-ROM
(Owner’s Manual)

Quick Start Guide

Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.

Index

Sound calibration
microphone
(ACM1HB)

Connections

Contents

Playback

Settings

Inserting the batteries

Tips

Appendix

NOTE
0 To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
0 Do not use a new battery together with an old one.
0 Do not use two different types of batteries.
0 Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long
periods.
0 If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery
compartment and insert new batteries.

Remove the rear lid in the direction of the arrow and
remove it.

Operating range of the remote control
unit
.

Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.

Insert two batteries correctly into the battery
compartment as indicated.
R03/AAA batteries

Approx. 23 ft/7 m

30°

Put the rear cover back on.
.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

30°

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Features
0 Audyssey LFC™ (Low Frequency Containment) (v p. 189)

High quality sound

Audyssey LFC™ solves the problem of low frequency sounds
disturbing people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey
LFC™ dynamically monitors the audio content and removes the low
frequencies that pass through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies
psychoacoustic processing to restore the perception of low bass for
listeners in the room. The result is great sound that no longer disturbs
the neighbors.

0 With discrete circuit technology, the power amplifier provides

identical quality for all 9-channels (165 Watts x 9-channels)
For optimum realism and stunning dynamic range, the power amplifier
section features discrete power devices (not integrated circuitry).
By using high current, high power discrete power devices, the amplifier
is able to easily drive high quality speakers.
0 Dolby Atmos (v p. 318)
This unit is equipped with a decoder that supports Dolby Atmos, a
completely new audio format. The placement or movement of sound is
accurately reproduced by the addition of overhead speakers, enabling
you to experience an incredibly natural and realistic surround sound
field.
0 Current feedback amplifier
This unit uses a high-speed current feedback amplifier circuit for its
preamplifier so that signals from a Blu-ray Disc player and other
equipment that support high-definition audio formats can be amplified
with high fidelity. The high-speed current feedback amplifier also
reproduces a natural sound space.
0 Audyssey DSX® (v p. 190)
This unit is equipped with Audyssey DSX® processor. By connecting
front height speakers to this unit and playing back with Audyssey DSX®
processing you can experience a more vertically expansive front
soundstage. By connecting two front wide speakers, you can
experience a wider and more expanded front soundstage.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

0 Discrete subwoofers and Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ (v p. 211)

The unit has two subwoofer output capability and can adjust the level
and delay for each subwoofer individually.
Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ makes the integration seamless by first
compensating for any level and delay differences between the two
subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 to both
subwoofers together for improved deep bass response and detail.
0 DTS Neo:X (v p. 142)
This technology enables the playback of 2-channel source audio or
7.1/5.1 multi-channel source audio through a maximum 9.1-channel
speakers, achieving an even broader soundstage.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Appendix

0 Digital video processor upscales analog video signals (SD

High performance

resolution) to HD (720p/1080p) and 4K (v p. 201)

0 4K 60Hz input/output supported

4K 60p
4:4:4

Up to 1080p

4K
Up scaling

4K 60p
4:4:4

Tips

This unit is equipped with a 4K video upscaling function that allows
analog video or SD (Standard Definition) video to be output via HDMI at
4K (3840 × 2160 pixels) resolution. This function enables the device to
be connected to a TV using a single HDMI cable, and produces high
definition images for any video source.

When 4K Ultra HD (High Definition) is used, an input/output speed of 60
frames per second (60p) is achieved for video signals. When connected
to 4K Ultra HD and 60p video signal input compatible TV, you can enjoy
the sense of realism only available from high-definition images, even
when viewing fast-moving video.
This unit also supports image processing for 4K 60p, 4:4:4 and 24-bit
videos. By processing the video at the original resolution, this unit lets
you enjoy flawless, high-definition picture quality.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

0 Equipped with HDMI ZONE2 output (v p. 168)

The ZONE2 multi-room output includes an HDMI output that lets you
enjoy a different A/V source in that room, with another program playing
in the main room.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

0 HDMI connections enable connection to various digital AV

Appendix

0 The device is equipped with a AirPlay® function in addition to

devices (8 inputs, 3 output)

Tips

network functions such as Internet radio etc. (v p. 127)

8 3

Out

You can enjoy a wide variety of content, including listening to Internet
Radio, playing audio files stored on your PC, and displaying
photographs stored on your PC on our television.
This unit also supports Apple AirPlay which lets you stream your music
library from an iPhone®, iPad®, iPod touch® or iTunes®.

For connection to a broad range of digital sources, this unit features 8
HDMI inputs, including 1 on the front panel that lets you quickly and
conveniently connect a camcorder, game console or other HDMIequipped device. There are dual HDMI outputs for the main room, and a
third HDMI output for another room.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

0 Playback of DSD and FLAC files via USB and networks

This unit supports the playback of high resolution audio formats such as
DSD (2.8 MHz) and FLAC 192 kHz files. It provides high quality
playback of high resolution files.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

0 Wireless connection with Bluetooth devices can be carried out

Tips

Appendix

0 Multi-Room audio (v p. 141)

easily (v p. 89)

【MAIN ZONE】

【ZONE2】/【ZONE3】

You can select and play back the respective inputs in MAIN ZONE,
ZONE2 and ZONE3.
In addition, when the All Zone Stereo function is used, the music being
played back in MAIN ZONE can be enjoyed in all the zones at the same
time. This is useful when you want to let the BGM propagate throughout
the whole house.

You can enjoy music simply by connecting wirelessly with your
smartphone, tablet, PC, etc.
0 Compatible with the “Marantz Remote App”z for performing basic

operations of the unit with an iPad, iPhone or Android™ devices
(Google, Amazon Kindle Fire)
“Marantz Remote App” is application software that allows you to
perform basic operations with an iPad, iPhone, Android smartphone or
Android tablet such as turning the unit ON/OFF, controlling the volume,
and switching the source.

0 Energy-saving design

This unit is equipped with an ECO Mode function that allows you to
enjoy music and movies while reducing the power consumption during
use, and also an auto-standby function that automatically turns off the
power supply when the unit is not in use. This helps reduce
unnecessary power use.

z Download the appropriate “Marantz Remote App” for your iOS or Android
devices. This unit needs to be connected to the same LAN or Wi-Fi (wireless
LAN) network that the iPhone or iPod touch is connected to.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Easy operation
0 “Setup Assistant” provides easy-to-follow setup instructions

First select the language when prompted. Then simply follow the
instructions displayed on the TV screen to set up the speakers, network,
etc.

0 Easy to use Graphical User Interface

This unit is equipped with a Graphical User Interface for improved
operability.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Part names and functions
Front panel
A
q

B
w

C
e

D
r

E
t

F
y

G
u
Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

qw e

r t

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

C INPUT SELECTOR knob
These selects the input source. (v p. 79)

D Main display
This displays various pieces of information. (v p. 20)
E Remote control sensor
This receives signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 9)

F VOLUME knob
These adjusts the volume level. (v p. 80)
G Door
When you are using buttons and/or connectors behind the door, press
the bottom of the door to open it. Be careful not to catch your fingers
when closing the door.

A Power operation button (X)
Used to turn the power of the MAIN ZONE (room where this unit is
located) on/off (standby). (v p. 79)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

B Power indicator
This is lit as follows according to the power status:
0 Off: Power on
0 Red: Normal standby
0 Orange:
0 When “HDMI Pass Through” is set to “On” (v p. 197)
0 When “HDMI Control” is set to “On” (v p. 197)
0 When “IP Control” is set to “Always On” (v p. 251)

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

With the door open
qw

e r

Tips

Appendix

C M-DAX button/indicator
This enables the M-DAX mode. (v p. 185)
This lights when the M-DAX mode is selected.

D Dynamic Volume button (DYNAMIC VOL)
This switches the Dynamic Volume settings. (v p. 189)
E Sub display
This displays various pieces of information. (v p. 22)
F BACK button
This returns to the previous screen. (v p. 178)
G Cursor buttons (uio p)
These select items. (v p. 178)
H ENTER button
This determines the selection. (v p. 178)

I SETUP button
This displays the menu on the TV screen. (v p. 178)

A DYNAMIC EQ button
This switches the Dynamic EQ settings. (v p. 188)
B PURE DIRECT button/indicator
This switches the sound mode between Direct, Pure Direct and Auto.
(v p. 144 - 145)
This lights when the Pure Direct mode is selected as the sound mode.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

M Audyssey DSX® button (A-DSX)
This switches the Audyssey DSX® settings. (v p. 190)
N Speaker A/B switching button (SPKR A/B)
This sets the front speakers to use. (v p. 244)

Q0 Q1

O HDMI OUT button
This sets the HDMI monitor output. (v p. 196)

Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7

P DIMMER button
Each press of this switches the brightness of the display. (v p. 259)

Q STATUS button
Each press of this switches the status information that is shown on the
display. (v p. 83)

J MOVIE button
This switches the sound mode to “Movie”. (v p. 143)
K MUSIC button
This switches the sound mode to “Music”. (v p. 143)
L GAME button
This switches the sound mode to “Game”. (v p. 143)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

NOTE

Q8
W2

Appendix

U Headphones jack (PHONES)
This is used to connect headphones.
When the headphones are plugged into this jack, audio will no longer
be output from the connected speakers or from the PRE OUT
connectors.

Tips

To prevent hearing loss, do not raise the volume level excessively when using
headphones.

V SETUP MIC jack
This is used to connect the supplied Sound calibration microphone.
(v p. 213)

W USB port
This is used to connect USB storages (such as USB memory devices)
and the USB cable supplied with iPod. (v p. 69)
.

X AUX1 HDMI connector
This is used to connect HDMI output compatible devices such as video
camcorders and game consoles. (v p. 66)

R ZONE SELECT button
These switch the zone (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2, ZONE3) that is operated
through the remote control unit. (v p. 173, 178)

Y AUX1 INPUT connector
Used to connect analog output compatible devices such as video
camcorders and game consoles. (v p. 66)

S ZONE2 ON/OFF button
This turns the power of ZONE2 on/off. (v p. 173)
T ZONE3 ON/OFF button
This turns the power of ZONE3 on/off. (v p. 173)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Display
o Main Display

The input source name, sound mode, setting values and other information are displayed here.

n Tuner display

n Standard display

These light up according to the reception conditions when the input source
is set to “HD Radio”.

r t

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

A Light illumination
When the power to this device is switched on, the surrounding area is lit
blue. The settings can be changed so the light does not switch on.
(v p. 167)
B Volume indicator
C Input source indicator
The currently selected input source name is displayed.
If the input source name has been changed using “Source
Rename” (v p. 208) in the menu, the input source name after the
change is displayed.

D Lights up when the broadcast is properly tuned in.
E In the FM mode, this lights up when receiving stereo broadcasts.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

n Sleep timer indicator

Tips

Appendix

n ZONE2/ZONE3 power on display

u i

G This lights up when ZONE2 (separate room) power is turned on.
(v p. 173)

F This lights when the sleep mode is selected. (v p. 157)

H This lights up when ZONE3 (separate room) power is turned on.
(v p. 173)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Sub Display
w

L
Q2

E Monitor output indicator
These light according to the HDMI monitor output setting. When set to
“Auto(Dual)”, the indicators light according to connection status.

C Audyssey® indicator
This lights when “MultEQ® XT32”, “Dynamic EQ”, “Dynamic Volume”,
“Audyssey DSX®” or “Audyssey LFCTM” is set. (v p. 187 - 190)

Rear panel

I
G
uH
i o

D Tuner reception mode indicators
These light up according to the reception conditions when the input
source is set to “HD Radio”.
TUNED: Lights up when the broadcast is properly tuned in.
STEREO: Lights up when receiving FM stereo broadcasts.

B Decoder indicators
These light when Dolby or DTS signals are input or when the Dolby or
DTS decoder is running.

Display

K
Q1

A Input signal indicators
The respective indicator will light corresponding to the input signal.
(v p. 209)

Front panel

J
Q0

F MULTI ZONE indicator
This lights up when ZONE2 or ZONE3 (separate room) power is turned
on. (v p. 173)

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

When playing HD Audio sources, the A indicator lights when a
signal from an extension channel (a channel other than the front,
center, surround, surround back, front height, front wide or LFE
channel) is input.

Q1 Q2

G Sleep timer indicator
This lights when the sleep mode is selected. (v p. 158)
H MUTE indicator
This blinks while the sound is muted. (v p. 80, 174)
I Volume indicator
J Information display
The input source name, sound mode, setting values and other
information are displayed here.
K Front speaker indicator
This lights according to the setting of the front A and B speakers.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

L Input/output signal channel indicators
The channel for input/output signals is displayed according to the
setting configured for “Channel Indicators”. (v p. 259)
0 When “Channel Indicators” is set to “Output” (Default)
These light when audio signals are being output from the speakers.
0 When “Channel Indicators” is set to “Input”
These light corresponding to the channels that include the input
signals.

ui o

Tips

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Rear panel

A
B
qw

L
Q2

Front panel

C
e

D
r

E
tF
y

M
Q3

u
G

H
i

N
Q4

Display

Rear panel

I
o

O
Q5

J
Q0

P
Q6

Remote

Q
Q7

Index

A
q K
Q1

Contents

Connections

Settings

A Bluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors
Used to connect the included external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless
connectivity when connecting to a network via wireless LAN, or when
connecting to a handheld device via Bluetooth. (v p. 74)
A Place the external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity
evenly over the screw terminal of rear.
B Turn clockwise until the antennas is fully connected.
C Rotate the antenna upwards for best reception.

Tips

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

B DC OUT jack
Used to connect devices equipped with the trigger function.
(v p. 76)
C Digital audio connectors (DIGITAL AUDIO)
Used to connect devices equipped with digital audio connectors.
(v p. 61)
D RS-232C connector
Used to connect home automation controller devices fitted with
RS-232C connectors. Consult the owner’s manual of the home
automation controller for more information about serial control of this
unit.
E FLASHER IN jack
Used when using a control BOX or other such control devices to control
this unit.
F SIGNAL GND terminal
Used to connect a ground wire for the turntable. (v p. 67)
G REMOTE CONTROL jacks
Used to connect infrared receivers/transmitters in order to operate this
unit and external devices from a different room. (v p. 75)

q w e r ty u

Playback

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

M Analog audio connectors (AUDIO)
Used to connect devices equipped with analog audio connectors.
(v p. 64)
N 7.1-channel input connectors (7.1CH IN)
Used to connect to a device that has multi-channel audio output
connectors. (v p. 68)
O Speaker terminals (SPEAKERS)
Used to connect speakers. (v p. 39)
P PRE OUT connectors
Used to connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or an external power
amplifier. (v p. 40, 58)
Q Component video connectors (COMPONENT VIDEO)
Used to connect devices equipped with component video connectors.
(v p. 62)

H Video connectors (VIDEO)
Used to connect devices equipped with video connectors.
(v p. 62)
I HDMI connectors
Used to connect devices equipped with HDMI connectors.
(v p. 60)
J NETWORK connector
Used to connect to a LAN cable when connecting to a wired LAN
network. (v p. 73)
K AC inlet (AC IN)
Used to connect the power cord. (v p. 77)
L FM/AM antenna terminals (ANTENNA)
Used to connect FM antennas and AM loop antennas. (v p. 71)

Front panel

Tips

NOTE
Do not touch the inner pins of the connectors on the rear panel. Electrostatic
discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Remote control unit
q
w
e
r
t

A Display
A LEARN indicator
This is lit when setting the learning function for the remote control unit.
(v p. 273)
B Information display
0 This displays “AVR” when operating this unit.
0 This displays the input source name when operating an external
device.
0 This displays “TV” when operating TV.
C l indicator
This is lit when signals are sent from the remote control unit.

B AVR operation button
When preset codes are registered to the remote control unit, press this
button and then operate the menu on the unit.
C SET button
This is used for various settings on the remote control unit.
(v p. 265, 273, 276, 277)
D ZONE SELECT button
These switch the zone (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2, ZONE3) that is operated
through the remote control unit. (v p. 173, 178)
E Device operation buttons (DEVICE X / DEVICE MENU)
These turn the power of external devices on/off and call up menus.
Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons.
(v p. 266)
F Input source select buttons
These select the input source. (v p. 79, 173)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Connections

Contents

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

G SLEEP button
This sets the sleep timer. (v p. 157)
H Channel/page search buttons (CH/PAGE df)
These select radio stations registered to presets or switch pages.
(v p. 83, 100)
I ECO Mode button
This switches to ECO Mode. (v p. 254)
J Information button (INFO)
This displays the status information on the TV screen. (v p. 260)
K Cursor buttons (uio p)
These select items. (v p. 178)

L BACK button
This returns to the previous screen. (v p. 178)

i
o
Q0

M HOME button
This takes you to the Home screen (Top screen) when the input source
is Online Music or iPod/USB. (v p. 83)

N System buttons
These perform playback related operations. (v p. 83)
0 Skip buttons (8, 9)
0 Play button (1)
0 Search buttons (6, 7)
0 Pause button (3)
0 Stop button (2)
Tuning up / Tuning down buttons (TUNE +, –)
These select either FM broadcast or AM broadcast. (v p. 96)

Q3
Q4

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

O SMART SELECT buttons (1 - 4)
These call up settings registered to each button, such as input source,
volume level and sound mode settings. (v p. 159)

P SOUND MODE buttons
These select the sound mode. (v p. 142)
0 MOVIE button
0 MUSIC button
0 GAME button
0 PURE button

Q9
W0

Q Number buttons
These enter numbers into the unit. (v p. 96)
R Remote control signal transmitter
This transmits signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 9)
S POWER button (X)
This turns the power on/off. (v p. 79, 173)
T TV operation buttons (TV X / TV MENU / TV INPUT)
These turn the TV power on/off, switch the TV input and call up menus.
Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons.
(v p. 269)

Q5
Q6

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

U TV operation buttons (TV X / TV INPUT)
These turn the TV power on/off, switch the TV input and call up menus.
Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons.
(v p. 269)
V Light button
This turns on the backlight for approx. 2 seconds. (v p. 276)
W VOLUME buttons (df)
These adjusts the volume level. (v p. 80, 174)

X MUTE button (:)
This mutes the output audio. (v p. 80, 174)
Y OPTION button
This displays the option menu on the TV screen. (v p. 131)

W2
W3
W4
W5
W6

Z ENTER button
This determines the selection. (v p. 178)
a SETUP button
This displays the menu on the TV screen. (v p. 178)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Contents

Tips

Appendix

o Cables used for connections
32

Connecting a TV

Connecting a playback device

Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port

Connecting an HD radio receiver

Connecting to a home network (LAN)

Connecting an external control device

Connecting the power cord

Provide necessary cables according to the devices you want to
connect.

Speaker cable
.

Connecting speakers

Subwoofer cable

HDMI cable

NOTE
0 Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed.
However, when the “Setup Assistant” is running, follow the instructions in the
“Setup Assistant” (page 9 in the separate “Quick Start Guide”) screen for making
connections. (During “Setup Assistant” operation, the input/output connectors do
not conduct current.)
0 Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in
noise.

Component video cable

Video cable

Coaxial digital cable

Optical cable
L

Audio cable

LAN cable

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting speakers
Install speakers and connect them to this unit. (v p. 32, 39)

Speaker installation
Determine the speaker system depending on the number of speakers you
are using and install each speaker and subwoofer in the room.
Speaker installation is explained using this example of a typical
installation.

FWL

FR
C

FWR
SW2

C (Center
speaker):

Place the CENTER speaker in between the front
speakers and above or below your TV.

SL/SR (Surround
speaker left/right):

Place the SURROUND left and right speakers an
equal distance to the left and right sides of the main
listening position. If you don’t have surround back
speakers, move the surround speakers slightly behind
your listening position.

SBL/SBR
(Surround back
speaker left/right):

Place the SURROUND BACK left and right speakers
an equal distance from the main listening position and
directly behind the main listening position. When using
a single surround back speaker (SB), place it directly
behind the listening position.

SBR

Place the FRONT left and right speakers an equal
distance from the main listening position. The distance
between each speaker and your TV should also be the
same.

SW1
SBL

FL/FR (Front
speaker left/right):

FWL/FWR
Place the FRONT WIDE left and right speakers
(Front wide speakers left/ outside of the front left and right speakers so that there
is an equal distance between all front speakers.
right):
SW 1/2 (Subwoofer) :

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Place the SUBWOOFER at a convenient location near
the front speakers. If you have two subwoofers, place
them asymmetrically across the front of your room.

Index

Contents

RHL

Connections

TRL
TML
TFL

Settings

RHR

FHR

FHL

TRR
TMR
TFR

Playback

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Tips

Appendix

FHL/FHR (Front
height speaker left/
right):

Place the FRONT HEIGHT left and right speakers
directly above the front speakers. Mount them as
close to the ceiling as possible and aim them
towards the main listening position.

TFL/TFR (Top front
speaker left/right):

Mount the TOP FRONT left and right speakers on
the ceiling slightly in front of your main listening
position and aligned with the left and right front
speakers.

TML/TMR (Top
middle speaker left/
right):

Mount the TOP MIDDLE left and right speakers
directly above the main listening position and
aligned with the left and right front speakers.

TRL/TRR (Top rear
speaker left/right):

Mount the TOP REAR left and right speakers on
the ceiling slightly behind your main listening
position and aligned with the left and right front
speakers.

RHL/RHR (Rear
height speaker left/
right):

Place the REAR HEIGHT left and right speakers
directly behind the main listening position. Mount
them as close to the ceiling as possible and
aligned with the left and right front speakers.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

FDL

Playback

Settings

Tips

About Dolby enabled speakers
Dolby enabled speakers reflect the sound off the ceiling to allow the sound
to come from over your head by using a special upward-pointing speaker
that is placed on the floor.
You can enjoy the Dolby Atmos 3D sound even in an environment where
speakers cannot be installed on the ceiling.

FDR

SDL

SDR

BDR

BDL

Place the FRONT DOLBY ENABLED speaker on
the front speaker. For a Dolby enabled speaker
integrated with a front speaker, place the Dolby
enabled speaker instead of the front speaker.

FDL/FDR (Front
Dolby speaker left/
right):

Place the SURROUND DOLBY ENABLED speaker
SDL/SDR (Surround on the surround speaker. For a Dolby enabled
Dolby speaker left/
speaker integrated with a surround speaker, place
the Dolby enabled speaker instead of the surround
right):
speaker.
BDL/BDR (Back
Dolby speaker left/
right):

Front panel

Place the BACK DOLBY ENABLED speaker on the
surround back speaker. For a Dolby enabled
speaker integrated with a surround back speaker,
place the Dolby enabled speaker instead of the
surround back speaker.

Display

Appendix

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Height speakers layout
DSX®,

0 This unit is compatible with Audyssey
Dolby Atmos and DTS Neo:X which
offers an even wider and deeper surround sensation. (v p. 317, 318, 321)
When using Audyssey DSX®, install front wide speakers or front height speakers.
0 Use the illustration below as a guide for how high each speaker should be
installed. The height does not need to be exactly the same.

TFL

Top middle speaker
Top front speaker
Top rear speaker

TML

z3
2
z

Front speaker

z2 30° - 55°
z5 135° - 150°

TMR

TRR

RHL

RHR

GViewed from the topH

Surround
speaker

z3 65° - 100°

z1 30° - 45°
z4 125° - 150°

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

TFR

TRL

Surround
back
speaker

GViewed from the sideH

Rear height
speaker
Point slightly
downwards

Front wide
speaker

Front height
speaker
Point slightly
downwards

FHR

FHL

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

FWL

z1
z3

z2:90°

- 110°

SBR

SBL

SBR
z3:135°

Listening
position

z1:

- 150°

22° - 30°

z2:

55° - 60°

z3:

90° - 110°

When using a single surround back speaker, place it directly behind the listening
position.

Front panel

Display

FWR

- 30°

SW C

z1:22°

Appendix

o When 9.1-channel speakers are installed using
front wide speakers

o When 7.1-channel speakers are installed using
surround back speakers

SBL

Tips

Rear panel

Remote

Index

z4:

135° - 150°

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o When 5.1-channel speakers are installed

z1:22°

Front panel

- 30°

z2:120°

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Layout including height speakers and top
speakers

Tips

Appendix

n DTS Neo:X layout example
Combination of 9.1-channel layout with surround back/front wide
speakers, and front height speakers.

n Dolby Atmos layout example
Combination of 7.1-channel layout with surround back speaker and
top front/top rear speakers.

FHL
TRL
TFL

TFR
SL

FWL

FL
SW

FR
C

SBL

SR
SBL

SBR

Front panel

FWR

FHR

TRR

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Speaker connection

0 Carry out the following settings when using a speaker with an impedance of 4 – 6
Ω/ohms.

1. Press and hold the main unit’s ZONE SELECT and STATUS at the same time
for at least 3 seconds.

NOTE

“Video Format < NTSC>” appears on the display.
2. Press i on the main unit twice.

0 Disconnect this unit’s power plug from the power outlet before connecting the
speakers. Also, turn off the subwoofer.
0 Connect so that the speaker cable core wires do not protrude from the speaker
terminal. The protection circuit may be activated if the core wires touch the rear
panel or if the + and - sides touch each other. (“Protection circuit” (v p. 327))
0 Never touch the speaker terminals while the power cord is connected. Doing so
could result in electric shock. When the “Setup Assistant” (page 9 in the separate
“Quick Start Guide”) is running, follow the instructions in the “Setup Assistant”
screen for making connections. (Power is not supplied to the speaker terminals
while the “Setup Assistant” is running.)
0 Use speakers with an impedance of 4 – 16 Ω/ohms.

Display

Appendix

NOTE

Here we connect the speakers in the room to this unit.
This section explains how to connect them using typical examples.

Front panel

Tips

Rear panel

“Sp.Imp. <8ohms>” appears on the display.

3. Use o or p on the main unit to select the impedance.
6ohms:

Select when the impedance for any of the connected speakers
is 6 Ω/ohms.

4ohms:

Select when the impedance for any of the connected speakers
is 4 Ω/ohms.

4. Press the main unit’s ENTER to complete the setting.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Connecting the speaker cables

Appendix

o Connecting the subwoofer

Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and + (red) and –
(black) polarities on the speakers being connected to this unit, and be
sure to connect the channels and polarities correctly.

Use a subwoofer cable to connect the subwoofer. Two subwoofers can
be connected to this unit.
To use two subwoofers, set “Subwoofer” to “2 spkrs” in the “Speaker
Config.” setting. (v p. 236)
The level and distance can be set separately for Subwoofer 1 and
Subwoofer 2.

Peel off about 3/8 inch (10 mm) of sheathing from the
tip of the speaker cable, then either twist the core wire
tightly or terminate it.

Tips

Turn the speaker terminal counterclockwise to loosen it.

Insert the speaker cable’s core wire to the hilt into the
speaker terminal.

SW1

SW2

Turn the speaker terminal clockwise to tighten it.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o About the speaker cable label (supplied) for
channel identification

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

Attach the speaker cable label for each channel to its speaker cable as
shown in the diagram.
Refer to the table and attach the label to each speaker cable.
Then, make connection so that the color of the speaker terminal
matches that of the speaker cable label.

The channel display section for speaker terminals on the rear panel is
color-coded for each channel to be identifiable.
Speaker terminals
Color
FRONT L
White
FRONT R
Red
CENTER
Green
SURROUND L
Light blue
SURROUND R
Blue
SURROUND BACK L
Beige
SURROUND BACK R
Brown
FRONT WIDE L
Light Purple
FRONT WIDE R
Purple
FRONT HEIGHT L
Light Yellow
FRONT HEIGHT R
Yellow
TOP FRONT L
Light Yellow
TOP FRONT R
Yellow
TOP MIDDLE L
Light Purple
TOP MIDDLE R
Purple
TOP REAR L
Light Purple
TOP REAR R
Purple
REAR HEIGHT L
Light Purple
REAR HEIGHT R
Purple
FRONT DOLBY L
Light Yellow
FRONT DOLBY R
Yellow
SURROUND DOLBY L
Light Purple
SURROUND DOLBY R
Purple
BACK DOLBY L
Light Purple
BACK DOLBY R
Purple
SUBWOOFER
Black

Front panel

Tips

G How to attach the speaker cable label H
Speaker

This unit

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Speaker configuration and “Amp Assign” settings
This unit has a built-in 9-channel power amplifier. In addition to the basic 5.1-channel system, a variety of speaker systems can be configured by changing
the “Amp Assign” (v p. 221) settings to suit the application, such as 7.1-channel systems, bi-amp connections and 2-channel systems for multi-zone
playback.
Perform “Amp Assign” settings to suit the number of rooms and speaker configuration to be installed. (v p. 221)
Playback speaker in each zone
MAIN ZONE

ZONE2
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
2-channel
Not used
2-channel
2-channel
1-channel
Not used

5.1-channel playback
7.1-channel playback (surround back)
9.1-channel playback
11.1-channel playback
7.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers)
9.1-channel playback + 2-channel speakers for stereo playback
7.1-channel playback + 2-channel bi-amp speakers for stereo playback
7.1-channel playback + front speakers of second unit
7.1-channel playback
7.1-channel playback
5.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers)
5.1-channel playback
7.1-channel playback
Dolby Atmos playback

ZONE3
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
2-channel
Not used
2-channel
1-channel
Not used

“Amp Assign” settings

Connection page

7.1ch + ZONE2 (Default)
7.1ch + ZONE2 (Default)
9.1ch
11.1ch
7.1ch (Bi-Amp)
9.1ch/2ch Front
7.1ch/2ch Front (Bi-Amp)
7.1ch + Front B
7.1ch + ZONE2 (Default)
7.1ch + ZONE3
5.1ch (Bi-Amp) + ZONE2
5.1ch + ZONE2/3
7.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO
Dolby Atmos

44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
52
53
54
55
56

The sound mode that can be selected varies according to the speaker configuration. See “Relationship between sound modes and channel output”
(v p. 309) for the sound modes that are supported.
The following pages provide basic connection examples.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

In addition to the connections described in (v p. 44 - 58), this unit allows for
various speaker connections with the “Amp Assign” setting.
Also refer to the menu screen in “View Terminal Config.” on the “Amp Assign” setting
screen, which shows how to make connections in your environment.
Speakers/Amp Assign
Assign Mode
-Height Speakers
-Height Layout
-Wide/Height2 Front Wide
-Pre-out
Top Rear

11.1ch
4 Height Speakers
Top Front & Top Rear

PRE OUT
T.REAR
HEIGHT1
HEIGHT1

SUBWOOFER
1

HEIGHT1

AUTO SWITCHING

SPEAKERS
FRONT

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

AUTO SWITCHING AUTO SWITCHING

Back

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Standard configuration and connection

n 5.1-channel playback

This serves as a basic 5.1-channel surround system.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n 7.1-channel playback (surround back)
This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with surround back speakers.

SBL

When using a single surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L
terminal.

SBR

SBL

Front panel

SBR

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Advanced connections
n 9.1-channel playback
This system, which is based on a 5.1-channel system, plays back up to 9.1-channels at the same time.
You can connect speakers for up to 11-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 10 or more channels, the output speakers
automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
FHL

FHR

FWR
SR

SBL

SBR

FWL

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

SBL FWR FWL FHR

FHL

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n 11.1-channel playback
This system, which is based on a 5.1-channel system, plays back up to 11.1-channels at the same time.
You can connect speakers for up to 13-channels for MAIN ZONE by using an external power amplifier. When you connect speakers for 12 or more
channels, the output speakers automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
TRL

FWL

TRR

TRL

TFR

TRR
TFL

SBL

FWR

Power amplifier
SR

SBR

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

SBR

Index

SBL FWR FWL

TFR

TFL

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n 7.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers)
This system plays back 7.1-channels. You can use the bi-amp connection for front speakers. Bi-amp connection is a method to connect separate
amplifiers to the tweeter terminal and woofer terminal of a speaker that supports bi-amplification. This connection enables back EMF (power returned
without being output) from the woofer to flow into the tweeter without affecting the sound quality, producing a higher sound quality.
You can connect speakers for up to 9 channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers
automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
FHL

FHR

FL
(Bi-Amp)

FR
(Bi-Amp)

SBL

SBR

SBL

FHR

SBR

(R)

(L)

NOTE
When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the short-circuiting plate or wire between the speaker’s woofer and tweeter terminals.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

FHL

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n Exclusive 9.1-channel playback + 2-channel playback speakers
You can connect speakers used exclusively for 2-channel playback, which are used for the direct and stereo modes, and speakers used exclusively
for 9.1 multi-channel playback. The speakers used exclusively for multi-channel playback and the speakers used exclusively for 2-channel playback
are automatically switched for playback in accordance with the sound mode.
Multi-channel playback
FHL

FHR

FL’ FL

FR FR’

C
SR

SBL

SBR

Switching
FHR

FHL
FL’ FL

FR FR’

C
SL

SBL

SBR

2-channel playback

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

SBL

FR’

FL’

FHR

FHL

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n Exclusive 7.1-channel playback + 2-channel playback (bi-amp connection) speakers
You can connect speakers used exclusively for 2-channel playback, which are used for the direct and stereo modes, and speakers used exclusively
for 7.1 multi-channel playback. You can use the bi-amp connection for the speakers exclusively used for 2-channel playback. The speakers used
exclusively for multi-channel playback and the speakers used exclusively for 2-channel playback are automatically switched for playback in
accordance with the sound mode.
Multi-channel playback

FL’

FR FR’

SBL

SBR

SBL

Switching
FL’
FL’
(Bi-Amp)

(R)

FR’
FL’
(Bi-Amp)
q

FR’

FL’

(L)

SBL

SBR

2-channel playback

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n 7.1-channel playback + front speakers of second unit
This system enables switching playback between front speakers A and B as desired.
You can connect speakers for up to 9-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers
automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
FHL

FHR

FL FL
(B) (A)

FR FR
(A) (B)

C
SR

SBL

SBR

FR
(A)

FL
(A)

SBR

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

SBL

FR
(B)

FL
(B)

FHR

FHL

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n 7.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback (ZONE2 or ZONE3)
This type of configuration plays back 7.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2.
(Speakers can output audio from ZONE3 instead of ZONE2 (Assign Mode: 7.1ch + ZONE3).)
You can connect speakers for up to 9-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers
automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
MAIN ZONE
FHL

FHR

SBL

SBR

ZONE2
R

ZONE2
L

ZONE2

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

SBL
ZONE2
R

FHR
ZONE2
L

FHL

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n 5.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers: MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback

(ZONE2)

This type of configuration plays back 5.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2. You can use the bi-amp connection for front speakers in
MAIN ZONE.
MAIN ZONE
FL
(Bi-Amp)

FR
(Bi-Amp)

SR
C

ZONE2 ZONE2
R
L

ZONE2
(R)

ZONE2
L

(L)

ZONE2
R
q

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n 5.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback (ZONE2) + 2-channel playback (ZONE3)
This type of configuration plays back 5.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2 and ZONE3.
MAIN ZONE

SR
FR

SL
ZONE2
R

ZONE3

ZONE2
L

ZONE2

ZONE2
R

ZONE3
L

ZONE3
R

ZONE2
L

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

ZONE3
R

ZONE3
L

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n 7.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 1-channel playback (ZONE2) + 1-channel playback (ZONE3)
This type of configuration plays back 7.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 1-channel (monaural) in ZONE2 and ZONE3.
You can connect speakers for up to 9-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers
automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
MAIN ZONE
FHL

FHR

SBL

SBR

ZONE2

ZONE3

ZONE3
Mono

ZONE2
Mono

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

SBL
ZONE3
Mono

FHR
ZONE2
Mono

FHL

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Dolby Atmos
This speaker configuration is optimized for Dolby Atmos playback.

n 11.1-channel system
This system configuration plays back 11.1-channels by using an external power amplifier.
TRL
TFL

TRR

Power amplifier

TRL

TFR

FL
SL

TRR

SBL

SBR

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

SBR

Index

SBL

TFR

TFL

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n 9.1-channel system
This configuration uses only this unit for Dolby Atmos playback.

TML

TMR

FL
SL

SBL

SBR

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

SBL

TMR TML

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Connecting an external power amplifier
You can use this unit as a pre-amp by connecting an external power amplifier to the PRE OUT connectors. By adding a power amplifier to each
channel, the realness of the sound can be further enhanced.
Select the terminal to use and connect the device.
Subwoofer
(Primary)
SUBWOOFER
1

Subwoofer
(Secondary)

Power amplifiers

AUDIO

AUDIO
FRONT
L

CENTER

HEIGHT2
L

AUDIO

HEIGHT1
L

FRONT
WIDE

SURROUND
BACK
L

SURROUND

SUBWOOFER
2

When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to
the left channel (L) terminal.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to this unit so that the input video is output to the TV. You can also enjoy audio from the TV on this unit.
How to connect a TV depends on the connectors and functions equipped on the TV.
ARC (Audio Return Channel) function plays TV audio on this unit by sending the TV audio signal to this unit via HDMI cable.

Is the TV equipped with an HDMI connector?
Yes

Is the TV compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) ?
No

Yes
“Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI
connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio
Return Channel)” (v p. 60)

Front panel

Display

“Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI
connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio
Return Channel)” (v p. 61)

Rear panel

Remote

“Connection 3 : TV equipped without
an HDMI connector” (v p. 62)

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC
(Audio Return Channel)
Use an HDMI cable to connect a TV that is compatible with the ARC function to this unit.
Set “HDMI Control” to “On” when using a TV that supports the ARC function. (v p. 197)
TV
HDMI
IN
(ARC)

When using the HDMI control function, connect to the HDMI
MONITOR 1 connector.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC
(Audio Return Channel)
Use an HDMI cable to connect the TV to this unit.
To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.
TV
IN

OPTICAL
OUT

HDMI
IN

OUT

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector
Use a component video or a video cable to connect the TV to this unit.
To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.
TV
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT

IN
VIDEO
IN

COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
Y
PB PR

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting a playback device
This unit is equipped with three types of video input connectors (HDMI, component video and composite video) and three types of audio input connectors
(HDMI, digital audio and audio).
Select input connectors on this unit according to the connectors equipped on the device you want to connect.
If the device connected to this unit is equipped with an HDMI connector, it is recommended to use HDMI connections.
In the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable.
0 “Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)” (v p. 64)

0 “Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player” (v p. 65)
0 “Connecting a video camcorder or game console” (v p. 66)
0 “Connecting a turntable” (v p. 67)

0 Connect devices to this unit as indicated by the input sources printed on the audio/video input connectors of this unit.
0 The source that is assigned to the HDMI IN, DIGITAL AUDIO IN, COMPONENT VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN and AUDIO IN connectors can be changed. See “Input Assign” on how
to change the input source assigned to the input connectors. (v p. 206)
0 To play back audio signals that are input to this unit on a TV connected via HDMI, set in the menu “HDMI Audio Out” to “TV”. (v p. 196)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)
This explanation uses the connection with a satellite tuner/cable TV STB as an example.
Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.
(HDMI incompatible device)
Satellite tuner/
Cable TV
AUDIO

VIDEO

AUDIO
OUT
R
L

COAXIAL
OUT

Satellite tuner/
Cable TV

VIDEO
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT
Y
PB PR

HDMI
OUT

or
L

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player
This explanation uses the connection with a DVD player or Blu-ray disc player as an example.
Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.
(HDMI incompatible device)
DVD player
AUDIO
AUDIO
OUT
R
L

COAXIAL
OUT

DVD player

Blu-ray Disc
player

HDMI
OUT

VIDEO

VIDEO
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT
Y
PB PR

or
L

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Connecting a video camcorder or game console
This explanation uses the connection with a video camcorders as an example.
Connect a playback device to this unit, such as a video camcorder or game console.
(HDMI incompatible device)
Video camcorder
AUDIO

VIDEO

AUDIO
OUT
L
R

VIDEO
OUT

HDMI
OUT

Video
camcorder

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting a turntable
This unit is compatible with turntables equipped with a moving magnet (MM) phono cartridge. When you connect to a turntable with a low output moving
coil (MC) cartridge, use a commercially available MC head amp or a step-up transformer.
If you set this unit’s input source to “PHONO” and you accidentally increase the volume without having a turntable connected, you may hear a hum noise
from the speakers.
Turntable
(MM cartridge)

AUDIO
OUT

GND

NOTE
The earth terminal (SIGNAL GND) of this unit is not for safety grounding
purposes. If this terminal is connected when there is a lot of noise, the noise can
be reduced. Note that depending on the turntable, connecting the ground line
may have the reverse effect of increasing noise. In this case, it is not necessary
to connect the ground line.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Connecting a device with a multi-channel output connector
You can connect this unit to an external device fitted with multi-channel sound audio output connectors to enjoy music and video.
To play analog signals input from 7.1CH IN connectors, set “Input Mode” (v p. 209) to “7.1CH IN”.
Devices with a multi-channel output connector
(Blu-ray Disc player, DVD player,
External decoder etc.)
AUDIO
SUBWOOFER

FRONT
L

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND
BACK
L

The video signal can be connected in the same way as a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player. “Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player” (v p. 65)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port
To connect an iPod to this unit, use the USB adapter cable that was supplied with the iPod.
For operating instructions see “Playing an iPod” (v p. 81) or “Playing a USB memory device” (v p. 86).

iPod

USB memory
device

Marantz does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a portable USB hard disk drive (HDD) which came with an AC adapter, use
that device’s supplied AC adapter.

NOTE
0 USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
0 It is not possible to use this unit by connecting the unit’s USB port to a PC via a USB cable.
0 Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory device. This may cause radio interference with other devices.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o Supported iPod/iPhone models
• iPod classic

• iPod nano

• iPod touch

• iPhone

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting an HD radio receiver
After connecting the antenna and receiving a broadcast signal, fix the
antenna with tape in a position where the noise level becomes minimal.
(“Listening to an HD Radio™ stations” (v p. 94))

AM loop antenna
(supplied)

If you are unable to receive a good broadcast signal, we recommend installing an
outdoor antenna. For details, inquire at the retail store where you purchased the unit.

NOTE
0 Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously.
0 Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the
panel.

FM indoor antenna
(supplied)
Black

White

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o AM loop antenna assembly

o Using the AM loop antenna

Suspending on a wall
Suspend directly on a wall without assembling.

Put the stand section through the bottom of the loop
antenna from the rear and bend it forward.
Insert the projecting part into the square hole in the
stand.
Stand
Square hole

Nail, tack, etc.
.

Loop antenna

Standing alone
Use the procedure shown above to assemble.
When assembling, refer to “AM loop antenna assembly”.

Projecting part

Front panel

Display

Appendix

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting to a home network (LAN)
This unit can connect to a network using a wired LAN or wireless LAN.
You can connect this unit to your home network (LAN) to enable various
types of playback and operations as described below.
0 Playback of network audio such as Internet Radio and from your media
server(s)
0 Playback of music content from online streaming services
0 Using the Apple AirPlay function
0 Operation on this unit via the network
0 Firmware Update

Wired LAN

To make connections via wired LAN, use a LAN cable to connect the
router to this unit as shown in the figure below.

NAS
(Network Attached
Storage)

LAN port/ Ethernet
connector

Modem

For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service
Provider) or a computer shop.

Internet
To WAN side
To LAN port
To LAN port

Router

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Wireless LAN

Tips

Appendix

0 When using this unit, we recommend you use a router equipped with the following
functions:

When connecting to the network via wireless LAN, connect the external
antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity connection to the rear panel
and stand them upright.
See “Wi-Fi Setup” (v p. 248) on how to connect to a wireless LAN
router.
Internet

Modem

0
To WAN side

0 Built-in DHCP server
This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.
0 Built-in 100BASE-TX switch
When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching hub with a
speed of 100 Mbps or greater.
Only use a shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable (readily available at electronics
stores). (CAT-5 or greater recommended)
The normal shielded-type LAN cable is recommended.
If a flat-type cable or unshielded-type cable is used, other devices could be
affected by noise.
When using a router that supports the WPS（Wi-Fi Protected Setup）function, WiFi connection can be carried out easily.
When using this unit connected to a network with no DHCP function, configure the
IP address, etc. in “Network”. (v p. 247)

NOTE
0 The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact your ISP or a
computer shop for details.
0 This unit is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE compatible router is required if
your contracted line is not set using PPPoE.
0 Do not connect a NETWORK connector directly to the LAN port / Ethernet
connector on your computer.
0 Various online services may be discontinued without prior notice.

Router with access point

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting an external control device
REMOTE CONTROL jacks
o Performing operations by RC on this unit
without visual contact

o Remotely connecting Marantz devices
When you are using a Marantz device other than this unit that supports
remote connection, you can transmit remote control signals just by
connecting the device to the REMOTE CONTROL IN/OUT connector
with a monaural cable.
Set the remote control switch located on the rear panel of the
connected audio component to “EXTERNAL” or “EXT.” to use this
feature.

You can connect an external IR receiver to the REMOTE CONTROL
connectors to perform operations on this unit with the supplied remote
control unit without visual contact. This might be necessary if the unit is
hidden in a cupboard or corner, so you can’t directly point with the
remote control unit to the device.
To do this, disable the remote control signal receiving function
(“Remote lock function” (v p. 166)).
Infrared
retransmitter

RC OUT

NOTE
When the remote control signal receiving function is disabled, you can not perform
operations with the remote control unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

DC OUT jacks
When a device with DC IN jack is connected, the connected device’s power on/standby can be controlled through linked operation to this unit.
The DC OUT jack outputs a maximum 12 V DC /150 mA electrical signal.

12 V DC/150 mA trigger-compatible device

NOTE
0 Use a monaural mini-plug cable for connecting the DC OUT jack. Do not use a stereo mini-plug cable.
0 If the permissible trigger input level for the connected device is larger than 12 V DC/150 mA, or has shorted, the DC OUT jack cannot be used. In this case, turn off the power
to the unit, and disconnect DC OUT jack.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Connecting the power cord
After completing all the connections, insert the power plug into the power outlet.

Power cord (supplied)

Front panel

Display

To household power outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Contents

Playback network audio/service

Basic operation

Listening to Internet Radio

105

Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS

109

Viewing photographs on the Flickr site

113

Listening to Pandora®

117

Turning the power on

Selecting the input source

Adjusting the volume

Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)

Selecting a sound mode

142

Playback a device
Playing a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player

Playing an iPod

Playing a USB memory device

Playing a Bluetooth device

Listening to an HD Radio™ station

Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio

124

AirPlay function

127

Spotify Connect function

130

Convenience functions
Convenience functions

131

HDMI control function

156

Sleep timer function

157

Smart select function

159

Panel lock function

164

Remote lock function

166

Switches light illumination on/off

167

Other functions

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Web control function

162

Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room)

168

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Basic operation
Turning the power on

POWER X

Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.

0 You can press the input source select button when the unit is in standby mode to
turn on the power.
0 You can also switch the power to standby by pressing X on the main unit.

Input source
select buttons

Selecting the input source

VOLUME df

MUTE :

Press the input source select button to be played back.
The desired input source can be selected directly.

You can also select the input source by turning INPUT SELECTOR on the main unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Adjusting the volume

Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume.

The following describes the procedure for playing DVD player/Blu-ray Disc
player.

1
2
3

Turning off the sound temporarily
(Muting)

Press MUTE :.
0 “MUTE” appears on the display.

0 : appears on the TV screen.

Prepare for playback.
A Turn on the power of the TV, subwoofer and player.
B Change the TV input to the input of this unit.

Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.
Press DVD or Blu-ray to switch an input source for a
player used for playback.
Play the DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player.

o Surround playback (v p. 142)

0 The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” in the menu. (v p. 186)
0 To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE : again.

Front panel

Display

Appendix

Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc
player

0 The variable range differs according to the input signal and channel level setting.
0 You can also adjust the master volume by turning VOLUME on the main unit.

Tips

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing an iPod
0 You can use the USB cable provided with the iPod to connect the iPod

with the unit’s USB port and enjoy music stored on the iPod.

0 For information on the iPod models that can be played back with this

unit, see “Supported iPod/iPhone models” (v p. 70).

0 See “AirPlay function” (v p. 127) on how to play a music file saved on

an iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes on this unit via the network.

iPod/USB
CH/PAGE df
OPTION

uio p
ENTER
BACK

1
89
67
3
2

HOME

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

This can be operated when the “iPod Browse Mode” (v p. 83) is
set to “From iPod”.
0 “iPod Browse Mode settings” (v p. 83)
0 “Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog
Enhancer)” (v p. 136)
0 “Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 137)
0 “Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 138)
0 “Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 139)
0 “Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode)” (v p. 140)
0 “Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 141)

Connect the iPod to the USB port. (v p. 69)
Press iPod/USB to switch the input source to “iPod/
USB”.

“Browse from iPod” is displayed on the display of this unit.
0 Nothing is displayed on the TV screen.

Operate iPod itself while seeing the iPod screen to play
back music.

0 “iPod Browse Mode” has two modes, “From iPod” and “On-Screen”. By default,
“From iPod”, where you operate the iPod itself while looking at the iPod screen, is
set.
0 To change to “On-Screen”, where you perform operations while having the iPod
information displayed on the TV screen, see “iPod Browse Mode settings”
(v p. 83).

NOTE
0 Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some functions may not
operate.
0 Note that Marantz will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems
arising with the data on an iPod when using this unit in conjunction with the iPod.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

o Operations accessible through the option
menu

Listening to music on an iPod

1
2

Tips

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

iPod Browse Mode settings

2
3

Playback

Pause

Stop

Skip to previous track / Skip to next track

Press OPTION when the input source is “iPod/USB”.

(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

The option menu screen is displayed.

ENTER

Select “iPod Browse Mode”, then press ENTER.

Playback / Pause
(Press and hold) Stop
Skip to previous track / Skip to next track

The “iPod Browse Mode” screen is displayed.

Use o p to select “On-Screen”, then press ENTER.

CH/PAGE d f

Switch to the previous page/next page in the list
display

HOME

Go to Home screen

0 Operations available for “On-Screen” and “From iPod” are listed

below.

iPod Browse Mode
Playable
files
Active
buttons

From iPod

On-Screen

Music file

Video file

Remote control
unit (This unit)

iPod

(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

0 The actions of the operation buttons may differ.

0 The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title etc. each time
the main unit’s STATUS is pressed during playback with “iPod Browse Mode” set
to “On-Screen”.
0 English letters, numbers and certain symbols are displayed. Incompatible
characters are displayed as “.” (period).

P
zOnly

Appendix

Operation buttons Function

In this mode, various lists and screens during playback on the iPod are
displayed on the TV screen.
This section describes the steps up to playing back tracks on the iPod in
“On-Screen”.

Tips

the sound is played.

Use ui p to select the file to be played, then press
ENTER.

Playback starts.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o Operations accessible through the option
menu
This can be operated when the “iPod Browse Mode” is set to “OnScreen”. (v p. 83)
0 “iPod Browse Mode settings” (v p. 83)
0 “Performing repeat playback” (v p. 85)
0 “Performing random playback” (v p. 85)
0 “Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog
Enhancer)” (v p. 136)
0 “Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 137)
0 “Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 138)
0 “Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 139)
0 “Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 141)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Press OPTION with “iPod Browse Mode” set to “OnScreen”.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2
3

Appendix

Performing random playback

Performing repeat playback

Tips

2
3

Use ui to select “Repeat”, then press ENTER.
Use o p to select repeat playback mode.

Use ui to select “Random”, then press ENTER.
Use o p to select random playback mode.

Off
(Default) :

Repeat playback mode is canceled.

Off
(Default):

Disable random playback.

One:

A file being played is played
repeatedly.

On:

Randomly play back all tracks in the
current playback folder.

All:

All files in the folder currently being
played are played repeatedly.

Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.

0 During random playback, each time playback of a track is completed, another
track is randomly selected for playback from tracks in the folder. Therefore, it’s
possible that you may hear a track played back more than once during random
playback.
0 “Random” settings are stored for each input source.

“Repeat” settings are stored for each input source.

Front panel

Display

Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing a USB memory device
0 Playing back music or viewing still picture (JPEG) files stored on a USB

memory device.

0 Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class standards

can be played on this unit.

0 This unit is compatible with USB memory devices in “FAT16” or

“FAT32” format.

0 The audio/video format types and specifications supported by this unit

for playback are as follows.
See “Playback a USB memory device” for details. (v p. 305)

iPod/USB

0 WMA
0 MP3

0 WAV

CH/PAGE df

0 MPEG-4 AAC
0 FLAC

OPTION

uip
ENTER
BACK
HOME

0 ALAC
0 AIFF
0 DSD

0 JPEG

1
89
67
3
2

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Playing files stored on USB memory
devices

1
2

Appendix

Operation buttons Function

Connect the USB memory device to the USB port.
(v p. 69)
Press iPod/USB to switch the input source to “iPod/
USB”.
USB

Tips

Playback

Pause

Stop

Skip to previous track / Skip to next track

(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
Playback / Pause

ENTER

(Press and hold) Stop
Skip to previous track / Skip to next track

[1/9]

Folder1
Folder2
Folder3
Music1
Music2

(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

CH/PAGE d f

Switch to the previous page/next page in the list
display

HOME

Go to Home screen

Music3
Music4

0 When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while
playing the file.
0 This unit plays back picture (JPEG) files in the order in which they are stored in the
folder.

Option

OPTION

Use ui p to select the file to be played, then press
ENTER.

NOTE

Playback starts.

Front panel

Note that Marantz will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising with
the data on a USB memory device when using this unit in conjunction with the USB
memory device.

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o Operations accessible through the option
menu
0 “Performing repeat playback” (v p. 132)

0 “Performing random playback” (v p. 132)

0 “Searching content with keywords (Text Search)” (v p. 134)

0 “Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time

(Slideshow)” (v p. 135)

0 “Setting the Slideshow Interval” (v p. 136)

0 “Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog

Enhancer)” (v p. 136)

0 “Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 137)

0 “Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 138)

0 “Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select)” (v p. 139)

0 “Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture

Mode)” (v p. 140)

0 “Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 141)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Listening to music on a Bluetooth device
Music files stored on Bluetooth devices such as smartphones, digital
music players, etc. can be enjoyed on this unit by pairing and connecting
this unit with the Bluetooth device.
Communication is possible up to a range of about 32.8 ft/10 m.
NOTE
To play back music from a Bluetooth device, the Bluetooth device needs to support
the A2DP profile.

Bluetooth

OPTION

ui
ENTER
BACK

1
89
67
3
2

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Pairing with a Bluetooth device

In order to enjoy music from a Bluetooth device on this unit, the Bluetooth
device must first be paired with this unit.
Once the Bluetooth device has been paired, it does not need to be paired
again.

At the end of the pairing, the device name appears on the display of
this unit.
0 Connect to the Bluetooth device while “Pairing” is being displayed
on the display of the unit.
Perform the connection with the Bluetooth device close to the unit
(about 3.3 ft/1 m).

Prepare for playback.
A Connect the supplied external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless
connectivity to the Bluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors
on the rear panel. (v p. 25)
B Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.

0 When connecting a second Bluetooth device, press and hold Bluetooth for
approximately 3 seconds or select “Pairing Mode” from the options menu to pair
the device. (v p. 93)
0 This unit can be paired with a maximum of 8 Bluetooth devices. When a 9th
Bluetooth device is paired, it will be registered in place of the oldest registered
device.
0 When a number appears on the display of this unit, check that it is the same
number as that shown on the screen of the Bluetooth device and then select “Pair”
for both the Bluetooth device and the unit.
0 Enter “0000” when the password is requested on the screen of the Bluetooth
device.

Press Bluetooth to switch the input source to
“Bluetooth”.
Bluetooth

Now Playing
Device
Music
Artist
Album

OPTION

Option

When using for the first time, the unit will go into the pairing mode
automatically and “Pairing...” will appear on the display of the unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

Select this unit when its name appears in the list of
devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth
device.

Tips

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Playing a Bluetooth device
Check the following before you play back music.
0 The Bluetooth function of the Bluetooth device must be turned on
0 Pairing must be completed

1
2

Press Bluetooth to switch the input source to
“Bluetooth”.

Tips

Appendix

Operation buttons

Function

Playback

Pause

Stop

Skip to previous track / Skip to next track

(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

The unit will automatically connect to the most recently used
Bluetooth device.

ENTER

Start playing the Bluetooth device.

Playback / Pause
(Press and hold) Stop
Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

0 The Bluetooth device can also be operated with the remote

control of this unit.

0 When the power of this unit is turned on, the input source will be automatically
switched to “Bluetooth” if a Bluetooth device is connected.
0 When the “IP Control” setting of this unit is set to “Always On” and a Bluetooth
device is connected with the unit in the standby state, the power of the unit will be
turned on automatically. (v p. 251)
0 Press STATUS on this unit during playback to switch the display between Title
name, Artist name, Album name, etc.
0 English letters, numbers and certain symbols are displayed. Incompatible
characters are displayed as “.” (period).

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

NOTE
0 To operate the Bluetooth device with the remote control of this unit, the Bluetooth
device needs to support the AVRCP profile.
0 The remote control of this unit is not guaranteed to work with all Bluetooth devices.
0 Depending on the type of Bluetooth device, this unit outputs audio that is coupled
to the volume setting on the Bluetooth device.

o Operations accessible through the option
menu
0 “Pairing with the Pairing Mode” (v p. 93)

0 “Performing repeat playback” (v p. 132)

0 “Performing random playback” (v p. 132)

0 “Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog

Enhancer)” (v p. 136)

0 “Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 137)

0 “Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 138)

0 “Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select)” (v p. 139)

0 “Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 141)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Pairing with the Pairing Mode

2
3

Press OPTION when the input source is “Bluetooth”.
The option menu screen is displayed.

Use ui to select “Pairing Mode”, then press ENTER.
The device will go into the pairing mode.

Select this unit when its name appears in the list of
devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth
device.

At the end of the pairing, the device name appears on the display of
this unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

0 When a number appears on the display of this unit, check that it is the same
number as that shown on the screen of the Bluetooth device and then select “Pair”
for both the Bluetooth device and the unit.
0 Enter “0000” when the password is requested on the screen of the Bluetooth
device.

Pair a Bluetooth device with this unit.

Tips

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Listening to an HD Radio™ stations
0 HD Radio stations offer higher sound quality than conventional FM/AM

broadcasts. It is also possible to receive data services and select
broadcasts from among up to eight multicast programs.
0 HD Radio Technology provides higher quality sound than conventional
broadcasts and allows reception of data services.

TUNER

Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables local radio
stations to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM sounds like today’s FM and
FM sounds like a CD.

CH/PAGE df
Program Service Data: Contributes to the superior user experience of HD
Radio Technology. Presents song name, artist, station IDs, and other
relevant data streams.

OPTION

uio p
ENTER

BACK
TUNE +, –

Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM channels. These
HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, original music as well as deep cuts into
traditional genre.

0–9

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Contents

0 HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital

Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD
Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corp.
For detailed information on HD Radio Technology, please go to
“www.hdradio.com/”
0 For antenna connections, see “Connecting an HD radio
receiver” (v p. 71).

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Listening to an HD Radio broadcast

1
2

Connect the antenna. “Connecting an HD radio
receiver” (v p. 71)

Press TUNER to switch the input source to “HD Radio”.
G TV screen H

Tips

Appendix

Use o p to select “FM” or “AM”, then press ENTER.
FM:

When listening to an FM broadcast.

AM:

When listening to an AM broadcast.

Press TUNE + or TUNE - to select the station you want
listen to.

Scanning is performed until it finds an available radio station. When
it finds a radio station, it stops the scan automatically and tunes in.

HD Radio
STEREO HD-AUTO

Now Playing

The modes for receiving FM broadcasts consists of “Auto” mode that automatically
searches available broadcast stations and “Manual” mode that lets you tune in using
buttons to change the frequency. The default setting is “Auto”. You can also use
“Direct Tune” to tune in by entering the frequency directly.
In “Auto” mode, you cannot tune in to radio stations if the reception is not good.
If this is the case, then use the “Manual” mode or “Direct Tune” mode to tune in.

CH 1
FM 92.10MHz

Tune

CH /

Preset

OPTION

Option

Operation buttons

TUNE+/-

G Display of this unit H

3
4

Function

TUNE +, –

Selects the radio station (up/down)

CH/PAGE d f

Selects preset radio stations

0–9

Preset channel selection /
Direct frequency tuning

Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.

Use ui to select “FM/AM”, then press ENTER.
This displays the reception band input screen.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o Operations accessible through the option
menu
0 “Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)” (v p. 98)

0 “Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)” (v p. 98)

0 “Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset

Memory)” (v p. 99)

0 “Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset

Memory)” (v p. 100)

0 “Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset

Name)” (v p. 101)

0 “Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)” (v p. 102)

0 “Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog

Enhancer)” (v p. 136)

0 “Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 137)

0 “Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 138)

0 “Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select)” (v p. 139)

0 “Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 141)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tuning in by entering the frequency
(Direct Tune)

2
3
4
5

You can change the mode for tuning into FM and AM broadcasts. If you
cannot tune in automatically with “Auto” mode, change the mode to
“Manual” and tune in manually.

Press OPTION when the input source is “HD Radio”.
The option menu screen is displayed.

2
3

Use ui to select “Direct Tune”, then press ENTER.
The screen that lets you enter the frequency is displayed.

Use ui or 0 – 9 to select a number and press p.
0 If o is pressed, the immediately preceding input is cancelled.

Repeat step 3 and enter the frequency of the radio
station you want to hear.
When setting is completed, press ENTER.
The preset frequency is tuned in.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)

You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in.

Tips

Press OPTION when the input source is “HD Radio”.
The option menu screen is displayed.

Use ui to select “Tune Mode”, then press ENTER.
Use o p to select the tune mode, then press ENTER.
Auto:

Automatically search for and tune to a receivable
radio station.

HD-Auto :

Automatically tune to the HD Radio station.

Analog-Auto :

Automatically tune to an analog station and analog
HD Radio station.

Manual:

Manually change the frequency one step at a time
each time the button is pressed.

AnalogManual :

Manually tune to an analog station and analog HD
Radio station.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Selecting an audio program

1
2

Tips

Tuning in to stations and presetting
them automatically (Auto Preset
Memory)

Select the tuning mode (“HD-Auto”, “Auto” or
“Manual”).

A maximum of 56 radio stations can be automatically preset.

Press TUNE + or TUNE – to tune in the desired
Multicast channel.

0 If the station you are tuning in has multiple audio programs,

“HD1”is indicated on the display.
If it only has one audio program, “HD” is indicated.
0 When the unit receives multicast channels, the multicast program
number (HD2) is displayed to the right of the station name.

2
3

0 This function is not available for AM HD Radio stations because they cannot
broadcast multicast channels.
0 If digital audio data cannot be received after the station is selected, or if the station
signal is weak, the unit may not be able to receive the multicast channels.
0 If the station signal is weak, the digital audio of the multicast channel may cut out.

Press OPTION when the input source is “HD Radio”.
The option menu screen is displayed.

Use ui to select “Auto Preset Memory”, then press
ENTER.
Press ENTER.
The unit starts to tune in to radio stations automatically and preset
them.
0 When presetting is completed, “Completed” is displayed for about
5 seconds and the option menu screen turns off.

The preset memory is overwritten.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Presetting the current broadcast
station (Preset Memory)

2
3
4

Appendix

Channel

Default settings

1–8

92.10 / 92.30 / 92.50 / 92.70 / 93.10 / 93.50 / 93.70 / 94.10
MHz

9 – 16

94.30 / 94.50 / 94.70 / 94.90 / 95.10 / 95.30 / 95.50 / 95.70
MHz

17 – 24

Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset.
(“Listening to an HD Radio broadcast” (v p. 96))

98.10 / 98.30 / 98.50 / 98.70 / 98.90 / 99.10 / 100.10 /
100.30 MHz

25 – 32

100.50 / 100.70 / 100.90 / 101.10 / 101.30 / 101.50 /
101.70 / 101.90 MHz

Press OPTION.

33 – 40

103.10 / 103.30 / 103.50 / 103.70 / 103.90 / 104.10 /
104.30 / 104.50 MHz

41 – 48

104.70 / 104.90 / 105.10 / 105.30 / 105.50 / 105.70 /
105.90 / 106.10 MHz

49 – 56

106.30 / 106.50 / 106.70 / 106.90 / 107.10 / 107.30 /
107.50 / 107.90 MHz

Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them
in easily.
Up to 56 stations can be preset.

Tips

The option menu screen is displayed.

Use ui to select “Preset Memory”, then press ENTER.
The list of already preset channels is displayed.

Use ui or 0 – 9 to select the channel you want to
preset, then press ENTER.

The current broadcast station that is preset.
0 To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4.

Listening to preset stations

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

100

Use CH/PAGE df or 0 – 9 to select the desired preset
channel.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Specify a name for the preset
broadcast station (Preset Name)

You can set the name to the preset broadcast station or change it.
Up to eight characters can be input.

1
2
3
4

Press OPTION when the input source is “HD Radio”.
The option menu screen is displayed.

Tips

Use ui to select a name label, then press ENTER.
The screen that lets you edit the Preset Name is displayed.
0 If you select “Set Defaults”, then the unit returns to displaying the
frequency.

Enter the characters, then press “OK”.
0 For character input, see “Using the keyboard

screen” (v p. 180).

Use ui to select “Preset Name”, then press ENTER.
The Preset Name screen is displayed.

Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.

Use o p to select the group of the broadcast station
you want to name.
Use ui to select the broadcast station you want to
name, then press ENTER.

Front panel

Display

Appendix

Rear panel

101

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Skipping preset broadcast stations
(Preset Skip)

2
3

A Use o p to select the group of broadcast stations you want
to skip.
B Use ui to select the broadcast station you want to skip.
C Use o p to select “Skip”.
The station you selected is not displayed.

Press OPTION when the input source is “HD Radio”.

The option menu screen is displayed.

Use ui to select “Preset Skip”, then press ENTER.

Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.

The “Preset Skip” screen is displayed.

n To set the stations you want to skip by groups

A Use o p to select the group of broadcast stations you want to
skip.
B Press u to select “Set No.z – z to Skip”, then press ENTER.
Skip all the broadcast stations that are included in the
selected group “z-z”.
(z is the selected group number.)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

n To set the stations you want to skip by
stations

Perform auto preset memory to save all the broadcasting stations that can
be received in the memory. Selecting a broadcast station becomes easier
by skipping unnecessary memories.

Tips

102

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Cancelling Preset Skip

1
2
3

Use o p to select a group containing a broadcast
station to cancel the skip for while the “Preset Skip ”
screen is displayed.
Use ui to select a broadcast station to cancel the skip
for.
Use o p to select “On”.
The skip is cancelled.

NOTE
Preset skip cannot be cancelled for groups.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

103

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Checking the HD Radio reception
information
Press STATUS on the main unit while an HD Radio
broadcast is being received.

The current reception information is shown on the display.

1. Normal
$
2. Frequency / Signal strength
$
3. Long Station name / Program and Program type
$
4. Title name / Artist name
$
5. Album name / Genre name

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

If the station signal weakens while receiving a digital broadcast (while “HD” and text
is displayed), the mode automatically switches to the analog reception mode (the
reception frequency is displayed).
Because of this, the “HD” and text may flicker if the station signal level is weak and
unstable.

Tips

104

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Listening to Internet Radio
0 Internet Radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet.

Internet Radio stations from around the world can be received.

0 The Internet radio station list on this unit the database service provided

by vTuner radio station.

0 The audio format types and specifications supported by this unit for

playback are as follows.
See “Playing an Internet Radio Station” (v p. 308) for details.
0 WMA

ONLINE
MUSIC
INTERNET
RADIO

CH/PAGE df

0 MP3

0 MPEG-4 AAC

OPTION

uio p
ENTER
BACK

1
2

HOME

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

105

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Listening to Internet Radio

Prepare for playback.
0 Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power.

(“Connecting to a home network (LAN)” (v p. 73))

Press ONLINE MUSIC.
0 You can also press INTERNET RADIO to select the input source

“Internet Radio” directly.

Use uio p to select “Internet Radio”, then press
ENTER.
Online Music

Favorites

Name of country:

Select the various regions.
Displays typical Internet Radio stations.

Search Stations :

Displays all Internet Radio stations that
this unit can tune in to.

Search Podcasts :

Displays Internet Radio stations in the
podcasts that this unit can tune in to.

Recommended
Stations :

Displays recommended Internet Radio
stations.

radiomarantz.com :

Displays Internet Radio stations added to
favorites in vTuner. For instructions on
how to add to favorites in vTuner, see
“Using vTuner to add Internet Radio
stations to favorites” (v p. 108).

Recently Played :

Displays recently played Internet Radio
stations. Up to 20 stations can be stored
in “Recently Played”.

Search by Keyword :

Displays Internet Radio stations
searched by keyword. For character
input, see “Using the keyboard
screen” (v p. 180).

Media Server

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

106

Appendix

Use ui to select the search method for the radio
station that you wish to playback and then press
ENTER.

Internet Radio

Tips

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Operation buttons

Function

Playback

Stop

ENTER

(Press and hold) Stop

CH/PAGE d f

Switch to the previous page/next page in the list
display

HOME

Go to Home screen

Appendix

Playing the last played Internet Radio
station

Use ui p to select the station, then press ENTER.
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.

Tips

Press INTERNET RADIO.
The source switches to “Internet Radio” and the last played radio
station plays.

o Operations accessible through the option
menu
0 “Searching content with keywords (Text Search)” (v p. 134)

0 “Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time

(Slideshow)” (v p. 135)

0 The display switches between track title and radio station name etc. each time the
main unit’s STATUS is pressed.
0 Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “.” (period).

0 “Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog

Enhancer)” (v p. 136)

0 “Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

NOTE

(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 137)

0 “Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 138)

The radio station database service may be suspended or be otherwise unavailable
without notice.

0 “Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select)” (v p. 139)

0 “Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 141)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

107

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Using vTuner to add Internet Radio
stations to favorites

4
5

There are many Internet Radio stations in the world, and this unit can tune
into these stations. But finding the radio station you want to hear may be
difficult, because there are too many stations. If this is the case, then
please use vTuner, an Internet Radio station search website specifically
designed for this unit. You can use your PC to search Internet Radio
stations and add them as your favorites. This unit can play radio stations
added to vTuner.

6
7

Check the MAC address of this unit.
(“Information” (v p. 247))

Use your PC to access the vTuner website (http://
www.radiomarantz.com).

Display

Rear panel

Select the search criteria (genre, region, language,
etc.) of your choice.

Select the radio station of your choice from the list, and
then click the Add to Favorites icon.
Enter the name of the favorite group, then click “Go”.
A new favorite group that includes the selected radio station is
created.
0 Internet Radio stations added to favorites in vTuner can be played
from “radiomarantz.com” (v p. 106) with this unit.

You can also add a radio station that is not in the vTuner list.

Enter the MAC address of this unit, then click “Go”.

Front panel

Enter your E-mail address and a password of your
choice.

hear.

vTuner.

Appendix

0 You can also enter a keyword to search for a station you want to

0 The MAC address is necessary when you create an account for

Tips

108

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS
0 This unit can play back music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) stored on a

PC and on Network Attached Storage (NAS) that supports DLNA.

0 The network audio playback function of this unit connects to the server

using technologies shown below.
Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service
0 The audio/video format types and specifications supported by this unit
for playback are as follows.
For details, see “Playing back a file saved on a PC or
NAS” (v p. 307).
0 WMA

ONLINE
MUSIC

0 MP3

0 WAV

CH/PAGE df

0 MPEG-4 AAC

0 FLAC

0 ALAC

OPTION

uio p
ENTER
BACK

0 AIFF
0 DSD

0 JPEG

1
89
67
3
2

HOME

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

109

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Applying media sharing settings
Here, we apply the settings to share music files stored on a PC and NAS on the network.
If you are using a Media Server, be sure to apply this setting first.
.

o When using Windows Media Player 11

o When using Windows Media Player 12
(Windows 7 / Windows 8)

1
2
3
4
5

1
2
3

Start up Windows Media Player 12 on the PC.
Select “More streaming options...” in the “Stream”.
Select “Allowed” in the “Marantz SR7009” drop-down
list.

Select “Allowed” in the drop-down list for “Media
programs on this PC and remote connections...”.

Follow the screen instructions to end the setting.

Start up Windows Media Player 11 on the PC.
Select “Media Sharing” in the “Library”.
Click the “Share my media” check box, select “Marantz
SR7009”, and then click “Allow”.
As you did in step 3, select the icon of the device (other
PCs and mobile devices) you want to use as a media
controller, and then click “Allow”.
Click “OK” to finish.

o Sharing media stored in NAS
Change settings on the NAS to allow this unit and other devices (PCs
and mobile devices) used as media controllers to access the NAS. For
details, see the owner’s manual that came with the NAS.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

110

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Playing back files stored on a PC and
NAS

4
5

Use this procedure to play music files, image files or playlists.

2
3

Prepare for playback.

Appendix

Use ui to select the server including the file to be
played, then press ENTER.
Use iu p to select the file, then press ENTER.
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.

A Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power.
(“Connecting to a home network (LAN)” (v p. 73))
B Prepare the computer. (vComputer’s operating instructions)

Operation buttons

Function

Playback

Pause

Press ONLINE MUSIC.

Stop

Use uio p to select “Media Server”, then press
ENTER.

Skip to previous track / Skip to next track

(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
Playback / Pause

ENTER

(Press and hold) Stop

Online Music

Favorites

Skip to previous track / Skip to next track

Internet Radio

Media Server

(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

CH/PAGE d f

Switch to the previous page/next page in the list
display

HOME

Go to Home screen

Tips

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

111

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Appendix

o Operations accessible through the option
menu

0 The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title each time the
main unit’s STATUS is pressed.
0 When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file includes album
art data, the album art can be displayed while the music files are playing.
0 If you use Ver.11 or later of Windows Media Player, the album art for WMA files
can be displayed.
0 WMA Lossless files can be played when using a server supporting transcoding,
such as Windows Media Player (Ver.11 or later).
0 This unit plays back picture (JPEG) files in the order in which they are stored in the
folder.

0 “Performing repeat playback” (v p. 132)

0 “Performing random playback” (v p. 132)

0 “Searching content with keywords (Text Search)” (v p. 134)

0 “Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time

(Slideshow)” (v p. 135)

0 “Setting the Slideshow Interval” (v p. 136)

0 “Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog

Enhancer)” (v p. 136)

0 “Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

NOTE

(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 137)

0 “Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 138)

0 When playing back music files with your PC or NAS connected through wireless
LAN, audio may be interrupted depending on your wireless LAN environment. In
this case, connect using a wired LAN.
0 Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may be required
for the file to be displayed.
0 The order in which the tracks/files are displayed depends on the server
specifications. If the tracks/files are not displayed in alphabetical order due to the
server specifications, searching by the first letter may not work properly.

Front panel

Tips

Display

Rear panel

0 “Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select)” (v p. 139)

0 “Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture

Mode)” (v p. 140)

0 “Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 141)

112

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Viewing photographs on the Flickr site
0 Flickr is an online photo sharing service. You can use this unit to view

photographs that have been made public by Flickr users. You do not
need an account to use Flickr.
To view photographs that you recorded yourself, you need an account
in order to upload these photographs to the Flickr server.
For details, see the Flickr homepage.
http://www.flickr.com/
0 You can view photographs shared by particular users, or all of the
photographs shared on Flickr.

ONLINE
MUSIC
CH/PAGE df
OPTION

uio p
ENTER
BACK

HOME

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

113

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Viewing photographs shared by
particular users

4
5

Prepare for playback.

Use ui to select “Add Flickr Contact”, then press
ENTER.
Enter the screen name that you wish to add to
“Contact” (Screen Name: User name you wish to view).
screen” (v p. 180).

Press ONLINE MUSIC.
Use uio p to select “Flickr”, then press ENTER.
Online Music

Favorites

Internet Radio

After inputting the “Contact”, press “OK”.
The screen name is added to “Contact”, and the screen name you
entered in step 5 is displayed on the top screen of Flickr.
0 If you enter a screen name that does not exist, “The Flickr Contact
you entered could not be found” is displayed. Check and enter
the correct screen name.

Use ui to select the screen name added to “Contact”,
then press ENTER.

Media Server

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

0 For character input, see “Using the keyboard

0 Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power.

(“Connecting to a home network (LAN)” (v p. 73))

2
3

Tips

114

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Use ui to select the folder, then press ENTER.

Use ui p to select the photograph, then press ENTER.

Displays the favorite photographs of the
specified user.

Operation buttons

Photostream :

Displays a list of shared photographs.

ENTER

PhotoSets :

Displays the folder (photograph album) list.

Contacts :

Displays the screen name used by the
specified user in Contacts.

Remove this
Contact :

Deletes a user from Flickr Contact.

Add this Contact :

Adds a user from Flickr Contact.

Display

Rear panel

Function
Playback
Stop
Playback

ENTER

115

Appendix

The selected photograph is displayed.

Favorites :

Front panel

Tips

(Press and hold) Stop

Display previous photograph / Display next
photograph

CH/PAGE d f

Switch to the previous page/next page in the list
display

HOME

Go to Home screen

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

0 “Setting the Slideshow Interval” (v p. 136)

Use ui to select “All Content”, then press ENTER.

0 “Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture

Mode)” (v p. 140)

Use ui to select the folder, and then press ENTER.
Displays photographs that are popular from the
Interestingness : number of user comments or number of times
they are added as favorites.
Recent :

Displays the most recently added photographs.

Search by text : Search for photographs by keyword.

Use ui p to select the photograph, then press ENTER.
The selected photograph is displayed.

NOTE
Depending on the file format, some photographs may not be viewable.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

o Operations accessible through the option
menu

Viewing all photographs on Flickr

1
2

Tips

116

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Listening to Pandora®
Pandora is an automated music recommendation and Internet Radio
service created by the Music Genome Project.
To listen to Pandora you will need a free Pandora account.
If you do not have a Pandora account, you can create one at
www.pandora.com or from the Pandora smartphone application.
Playback of Pandora in this unit requires the Pandora account to be linked
to the unit. Therefore, access http://www.pandora.com/marantz from your
personal computer and perform the linkage.

ONLINE
MUSIC
CH/PAGE df
OPTION

uio p
ENTER
BACK

1
9
3
2

HOME

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

117

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Listening to Pandora®

Appendix

If you have a Pandora account, use ui to select “I
have a Pandora account”, then press ENTER.

0 If you do not have a Pandora account, to select “I am to new to

Prepare for playback.

Pandora”. The URL of Pandora and activation code are
displayed. Access the Pandora web page from your PC and
register the displayed activation code and account information.
Then press ENTER.

0 Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power.

(“Connecting to a home network (LAN)” (v p. 73))

Press ONLINE MUSIC.
Use uio p to select “Pandora”, then press ENTER.

Pandora

I have a Pandora account
I am to new to Pandora
Online Music

Favorites

Please go to
http://www.pandora.com/marantz and follow
the instructions there to create a new account.

Internet Radio

Your activation code is : zzzzzz
Media Server
BACK

Cancel

Continue

This is an identification code required to
register your purchased product to the
Pandora service.This code is used to
obtain your account.
.

2
3

Tips

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

118

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Input “Email address” and “Password”.
0 For character input, see “Using the keyboard

screen” (v p. 180).

0 Press BACK to cancel the input. When “Cancel input?” is

displayed, select “Yes”, then press ENTER.

After inputting the “Email address” and “Password”,
select “OK”, then press ENTER.

If the “Email address” and “Password” match, the top menu for
Pandora is displayed.
My Station

[1/4]

New Station
Shuffle
Music1 Radio
Sign Out

OPTION

Option

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

119

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Creating a new station

Operation buttons

You can create up to 100 radio stations.

1
2

Use ui to select “New Station”, then press ENTER.
Input a track or artist name, then press “OK”.

Use ui to select “Search by Artist” or “Search by
Track”, then press ENTER.

You can search and display a list by track or artist.

Playback

Pause

Stop

Skip to next track
Playback / Pause
(Press and hold) Stop

Skip to next track

CH/PAGE d f

Switch to the previous page/next page in the list
display

HOME

Go to Home screen

Use ui, select a file from the list, press ENTER.
New station is created.

Your new station will play music with similar qualities to the artist or track you
entered.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

120

Appendix
Function

ENTER

0 For character input, see “Using the keyboard

screen” (v p. 180).

Tips

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Listening to an existing station

Use ui and select the radio station that you want to
listen to, then press ENTER.

You can skip up to 6 tracks that are being played back within 1 hour.

Listening to created radio stations at
random

Use ui to select “Shuffle”, then press ENTER.
Created radio stations are selected at random, and tracks are
streamed.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

121

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Giving feedback and managing
stations
You can personalize your stations by providing feedback.

Press p while a track is playing.
The Pandora menu screen is displayed.

I like this track :

Press when you like the track that is being
played.
Playback a favorite track.
Display the E (Thumbs up) icon.

I don’t like this
track :

Press when you don’t like the track that is
being played.
Delete that track from the radio station.
Display the D (Thumbs down) icon.

Why is this track
playing? :

Displays the reason why Pandora selected
this track.

Create station :

Creates a station for the track or artist being
played.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

122

Tips

Appendix

Bookmark this
track :

Bookmarks the artist currently being played.
You can check on a computer or iPhone etc.
For details, see the Pandora web page.

I’m tired of this
track :

Press when you don’t like the track that is being
played.
The track will not be played for 1 month.

Delete this
station :

Press when you want to delete the station that
is being played.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Sign Out
Disassociate this unit from your Pandora account.

1
2

Use ui to select “Sign Out”, then press ENTER.
When the popup menu appears, use o p to select
“Yes”, then press ENTER.

o Operations accessible through the option
menu
0 “Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog

Enhancer)” (v p. 136)

0 “Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 137)

0 “Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 138)

0 “Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select)” (v p. 139)

0 “Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture

Mode)” (v p. 140)

0 “Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 141)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

123

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio
You can access SiriusXM to enjoy access to a wide range of unique
content.
An All Access package lets you listen to SiriusXM on your computer,
smartphone, tablet or Lynx Portable.
For details, see the SiriusXM homepage.
http://www.siriusxm.com

ONLINE
MUSIC
CH/PAGE df
OPTION

uio p
ENTER
BACK

1
2

HOME

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

124

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio

Over 155 channels commercial-free music, plus play-by-play sports,
exclusive talk, comedy and entertainment.

Online Music

Prepare for playback.

Favorites

A Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power.
(“Connecting to a home network (LAN)” (v p. 73))
B Access the following website from your PC and obtain a SiriusXM
account.
http://www.siriusxm.com
0 If you already have SiriusXM Internet Radio credentials, select
Sign in in step 4 and enter your SiriusXM username and
password. If you need to setup a SiriusXM account or Internet
Radio credentials, visit www.siriusxm.com/care

Internet Radio

Media Server

4
5

Press ONLINE MUSIC.

Select “Sign in” and then press ENTER.
Input “Username” and “Password”.
0 For character input, see “Using the keyboard

screen” (v p. 180).

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

125

Appendix

Use uio p to select “SiriusXM”, then press ENTER.

Tips

Select the “Sign in”, then press ENTER.
The top menu of SiriusXM is displayed.

Remote

Index

Contents

7
8

Connections

Playback

Settings

Disassociate this unit from your SiriusXM account.

Use ui to select the file, then press ENTER.

1
2

The selected file is displayed.
Function
Playback

Appendix

Sign Out

Use ui to select the genre, then press ENTER.

Operation buttons

Tips

Use ui to select “Sign Out”, then press ENTER.
When the popup menu appears, use o p to select
“Yes”, then press ENTER.

Stop

2
ENTER

Playback

o Operations accessible through the option
menu

(Press and hold) Stop

CH/PAGE d f

Switch to the previous page/next page in the list
display

HOME

Go to Home screen

0 “Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog

Enhancer)” (v p. 136)

0 “Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 137)

0 “Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 138)

0 “Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select)” (v p. 139)

0 “Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture

Mode)” (v p. 140)

0 “Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 141)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

126

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

AirPlay function
Music files stored on your iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes can be
played on this unit via the network.

PC
This unit

0 X is displayed on the menu screen while AirPlay is being operated.
0 Source input will be switched to “Online Music” when AirPlay playback is started.
0 You can stop AirPlay playback by pressing o or choosing other input source.
0 To see song and artist names together, press STATUS on the main unit.
0 For information about how to use iTunes, also see the Help for iTunes.
0 The screen may differ depending on the OS and software versions.

Router

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

127

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod
touch or iPad

1
2

Connect your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad Wi-Fi to the
same network as this unit.
0 For details, see your device’s manual.

Install iTunes 10, or later, on a Mac or Windows PC that
is connected to the same network as this unit.
Turn this unit ON.
Set “IP Control” to “Always On” for this unit. (v p. 251)
NOTE

Play the song on your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad.

When “IP Control” is set to “Always On”, the unit consumes more standby
power.

' is displayed on the iPhone, iPod touch or iPad screen.

Tap the AirPlay icon '.

Start iTunes and click the AirPlay icon ' to select the
main unit.

Appendix

Playing iTunes music with this unit

If you update your “iPhone/iPod touch/iPad” to iOS 4.2.1 or later, you can
stream music stored in your “iPhone/iPod touch/iPad” directly to this unit.

Tips

4
AirPlay

AirDrop

Choose a song and click play in iTunes.
The music will stream to this unit.

Select the speaker (devices) you want to use.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

128

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Selecting multiple speakers (devices)

With this unit’s remote control unit, you can perform iTunes song play,
pause, and auto search (cue) operations.

Click the AirPlay icon ' and select “Multiple”.

1
2
3

Check the speakers you want to use.

NOTE
In playback using the AirPlay function, the sound is output at the iPhone, iPod touch,
iPad or iTunes volume setting level.
You should turn down the iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes volume prior to
playback and then adjust it to a suitable level.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

Perform iTunes playback operations
with the remote control unit of this unit

It is possible to play iTunes songs on your home’s AirPlay compatible
speakers (devices) other than those of this unit.

1
2

Tips

129

Select the “Edit” - “Preferences...” in the iTunes menu.
Select “Devices” in the iTunes setting window.
Check “Allow iTunes audio control from remote
speakers”, and then click “OK”.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Spotify Connect function
Spotify is the world’s most popular streaming service. If you subscribe to
Spotify Premium, you can control your new speaker with your phone or
tablet. Because Spotify is built-in to your speaker, you can still take calls or
use other apps - the music never stops.
To try Spotify Premium free for 30 days, or learn more about Connect,
please go to www.spotify.com/connect.

Playing Spotify music with this unit
Download the “Spotify App” onto your Android or iOS device beforehand.
To play a Spotify track in this unit, you need to register in the Spotify
premium account first.

Spotify server

2
3
4

Launch the Spotify App.
Play back the Spotify track.
Tap the F icon to select the unit.

Control

0:13

4:44

Audio streaming/control

Connect the Wi-Fi settings of the iOS or Android device
in the same network as this unit.

The music will stream to this unit.
This unit

Spotify App

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

130

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Convenience functions
This section explains how to use convenient functions that can be used for
each input source.

ONLINE
MUSIC
OPTION

uio p
ENTER

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

131

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Performing repeat playback

Tips

Performing random playback

n Supported input sources :
USB / Media Server / Bluetooth

2
3

Appendix

While content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.

2
3

Use ui to select “Repeat”, then press ENTER.
Use o p to select repeat playback mode.

While content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.

Use ui to select “Random”, then press ENTER.
Use o p to select random playback mode.

Off
(Default):

Repeat playback mode is canceled.

Off
(Default):

Disable random playback.

One:

A file being played is played
repeatedly.

On:

Randomly play back all tracks in the
current playback folder.

All:

All files in the folder currently being
played are played repeatedly.

Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.

0 During random playback, each time playback of a track is completed, another
track is randomly selected for playback from tracks in the folder. Therefore, it’s
possible that you may hear a track played back more than once during random
playback.
0 This cannot be set up if the Bluetooth device does not support the random setting
under the AVRCP profile.
0 “Random” settings are stored for each input source.

0 This cannot be set up if the Bluetooth device does not support the repeat setting
under the AVRCP profile.
0 “Repeat” settings are stored for each input source.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.

132

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Registering to Favorites
n Supported input sources : Internet Radio /
Media Server / Pandora / SiriusXM

1
2

While content is playing, press OPTION.

Press ONLINE MUSIC.
Use uio p to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER.

The option menu screen is displayed.
Online Music

Use ui to select “Save to Favorites”, then press
ENTER.

Favorites

“Favorite added” is displayed, and the current content is added to
favorites.
0 The display returns to the playback screen when the procedure is
completed.

Internet Radio

Media Server

Appendix

Playing back content added to the
“Save to Favorites”

You can register a total of 100 favorites.

Tips

Use ui to select the content you want to play, then
press ENTER.

Playback starts.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

133

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Deleting content added to favorites

1
2
3

Appendix

Searching content with keywords (Text
Search)

Press ONLINE MUSIC.
Use uio p to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER.

n Supported input sources :
USB / Internet Radio / Media Server

Use ui to select the content you want to delete from
favorites, then press OPTION.

The option menu screen is displayed.

Tips

Use ui to select “Remove from Favorites”, then press
ENTER.

“Favorite removed” is displayed, and the selected content is deleted
from favorites.
0 The screen returns to the previous screen when the delete
process is complete.

While the content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.

Use ui to select “Text Search”, then press ENTER.
The keyboard input screen is displayed.

Enter the first character of the Internet Radio station or
file you want to search for, and then press “OK”.
0 For character input, see “Using the keyboard

screen” (v p. 180).

Use ui to select the content you want to play, then
press ENTER.

Playback starts.

“Text Search” searches for Internet Radio stations or files that start with the entered
first character from the displayed list.

NOTE
Text Search may not work for some lists.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

134

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time (Slideshow)
n Supported input sources : USB

n Supported input sources :
Internet Radio / Media Server

Play back a still picture.

0 Playing back still pictures stored on USB memory devices.

(v p. 87)

2
3
4

Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.

Use ui to select “Slideshow”, then press ENTER.
The option menu disappears, and the picture you were viewing is
shown on the screen.

Display

0 Play back still pictures stored on Media Server. (v p. 109)

0 Play back still pictures stored on Flickr. (v p. 113)

Play back a music file. (v p. 87)

Front panel

Play back a still picture.

Rear panel

135

Play back a music file of Media Server or Internet Radio
station. (v p. 105, 109)
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.

Use ui to select “Slideshow”, then press ENTER.
The option menu disappears, and the picture you were viewing is
shown on the screen.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Setting the Slideshow Interval

This function adjusts the center channel frequency band to enhance the
dialog in the movies and vocals in music for easier listening.

n Supported input sources :
USB / Media Server / Flickr

2
3

1
2

While the list is displayed, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.

Use ui to select “Slideshow Interval”, then press
ENTER.
Use o p to set the display time.
Off:

The slide show is not played back.

5s - 60s
Set the time for displaying a single picture when
(Default: 5s): playing back images in the slide show.

Press OPTION.
Use ui to select “Dialog Enhancer”, then press
ENTER.
Use o p to select your favorite enhancement effect.
Off
(Default):

Does not enhance the dialog or
vocals.

Low / Medium / High:

Enhances the dialog and vocals.

Press ENTER.

“Dialog Enhancer” settings are stored for each source.

Press ENTER.

The “Slideshow Interval” settings are reflected for all input sources.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

Adjusting the audibility of dialog and
vocals (Dialog Enhancer)

Set the playback interval when playing back a slideshow of still picture
(JPEG) files stored on a USB memory device or media server, or on the
Flickr website.

Tips

136

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Adjusting the volume of each channel
to match the input source (Channel
Level Adjust)

Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.

Use ui to select “Channel Level Adjust”, then press
ENTER.

The channel level adjust screen is displayed.

3
4

Use ui to select the channel that you wish to adjust.
Use o p to adjust the volume.
–12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

0 Select “Reset” and press ENTER if you want to restore the adjustment values of
the various channels to “0.0 dB” (default).
0 Headphone volume can be adjusted when a headphone is connected.
0 “Channel Level Adjust” settings are stored for each input source.
0 You can only set this for speakers that output audio. In addition, you cannot set
this when in the menu “HDMI Audio Out” is set to “TV”. (v p. 196)

The volume of each channel can be changed while listening to music. You
can set this for each input source.

Tips

137

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Adjusting the tone (Tone)

Adjusts the tonal quality of the sound.

1
2
3

Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.

Use ui to select “Tone”, then press ENTER.
The Tone screen is displayed.

Tips

Appendix

Select “On” in step 3 and press i to select the sound
range to be adjusted.
Bass:

Adjust bass.

Treble:

Adjust treble.

Use o p to adjust the tone, then press ENTER.
-6 dB – +6 dB (Default : 0 dB)

Use o p to set the tone control function to on/off.
On:

Allow tone adjustment (bass, treble).

Off
(Default):

Playback without tone adjustment.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

“Tone” settings are stored for each input source.
This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.
This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” is set to “On”. (v p. 188)
You cannot set this when no audio signal is input or in the menu “HDMI Audio Out”
is set to “TV”. (v p. 196)
0 This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.

0
0
0
0

138

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Displaying your desired video during
audio playback (Video Select)

4
5

This unit can display video from a different source on TV during audio
playback. You can set this for each input source.

n Supported input sources:
iPod/USB / CDz / HD Radio / Online Music /
Bluetooth / Phono

Tips

If you selected “On” in step 3, press i and select
“Source”.
Use o p to select the input source for video you want
to play back, then press ENTER.

“Video Select” settings are stored for each input source.

z This cannot be set when any of the HDMI, component video or video
connectors are assigned.

1
2
3

Press OPTION during audio playback.
The option menu screen is displayed.

Use ui to select “Video Select”, then press ENTER.
Use o p to select the Video Select mode.
Off
(Default):

Disable Video Select mode.

On:

Enable Video Select mode.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

139

Appendix

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Adjusting the picture quality for your
viewing environment (Picture Mode)

n Supported input sources :

CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Game / AUX1 /
AUX2 / Media Player / iPod/USB /
Online Music / CDz / TV Audioz

z You can set the picture mode when an HDMI, component video or video
connector is assigned.

1
2

Tips

Use o p to select picture mode.
Off:

No picture quality adjustment is done with this unit.

Standard:

The standard mode suited for most living room
viewing environments.

Movie:

A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room
such as a theater room.

Vivid:

A mode that makes graphic images for games, etc.
brighter and more vivid.

Streaming: A mode suited for low bit rate video sources.

Press OPTION during video playback.
The option menu screen is displayed.

Use ui to select “Picture Mode”, then press ENTER.

ISF Day:

A mode suited for watching movies in a bright room
during the day.

ISF Night:

A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room at
night.

Custom:

Adjusts the picture quality manually.

Press ENTER.

“Picture Mode” settings are stored for each input source.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

140

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

You can play back the music being played back in MAIN ZONE
simultaneously in ZONE2 and ZONE3 (other rooms).
It is useful when you want to enjoy the same music at the same time in
multiple rooms during home party or when you want to play back the same
BGM in the entire house.

2
3

Appendix

o Stopping the All Zone Stereo mode

Playing the same music in all zones (All
Zone Stereo)

Tips

During playback in All Zone Stereo mode, press
OPTION.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2
3

Press OPTION.

Use ui to select “All Zone Stereo”, then press ENTER.
Select “Stop”, then press ENTER.

The option menu screen is displayed.
0 The All Zone Stereo mode is canceled even when the power supply of the MAIN
ZONE is turned off.
0 In the All Zone Stereo mode, only the “Multi Ch Stereo” and “Stereo” sound modes
can be selected.
0 When “HDMI Audio Out” is set to “TV”, the All Zone Stereo mode is not available.
(v p. 196)
0 When “Input Mode” is set to other than “7.1CH IN”, the All Zone Stereo mode is
available. (v p. 209)

Use ui to select “All Zone Stereo”, then press ENTER.
Select “Start”, then press ENTER.
0 The input sources for ZONE2 and ZONE3 are switched to the

same input source as for MAIN ZONE, and playback starts in the
All Zone Stereo mode.
0 When you do not want ZONE2 or ZONE3 to participate in All
Zone Stereo, press ENTER to clear the check mark and then
press “Start”.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

141

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Selecting a sound mode
This unit allows you to enjoy various kinds of surround and stereo
playback modes.
Disc formats such as Blu-ray Disc and DVD, as well as being supported by
digital broadcasting, and even by streaming movies and music from
internet-based subscription services.
This unit supports playback of almost all of these multi-channel audio
formats. It also supports surround playback of audio formats other than
multi-channel audio such as 2-channel stereo audio.
For audio formats recorded on a disc, see the disc jacket or label.

GAME
PURE

MUSIC
MOVIE

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

142

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

0 Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to display a list of the sound modes

that can be selected. Each time you press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME,
the sound mode changes.
0 While the list is displayed, you can also use ui to select a sound
mode.
0 Try out various sound modes and enjoy sound mode in your favorite
mode.
GExampleH When MOVIE is pressed

Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to select a sound mode.
MOVIE :

Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying movies
and TV programs.

MUSIC : Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying music.
GAME : Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying games.

MOVIE SOUND

0 The MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME button memorizes the last sound mode selected for
its button. Pressing MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME recalls the same sound mode as
the one selected at the previous playback.
0 If the content played back does not support the previously selected sound mode,
the most appropriate sound mode for the content is automatically selected.
0 This can also be set by pressing MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME on the main unit.

Stereo
Dolby Surround
DTS Neo:X Cinema
Multi Ch Stereo
Virtual

Front panel

Display

Appendix

o Switching the sound mode

Selecting a sound mode

Tips

Rear panel

143

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Appendix

Pure Direct playback

Direct playback

This mode is for playback with higher sound quality than in Direct playback
mode.
This mode turns off the main unit display and analog video circuit. Doing
so suppresses noise sources that affect sound quality.

Sound recorded in source is played as is.

Tips

Press PURE to select “Direct”.
Direct playback begins.

0 While DSD signals are played back, “DSD Direct” is displayed.
0 This can also be set by pressing PURE DIRECT on the main unit.

Press PURE to select “Pure Direct”.
The display goes dark, and Pure Direct playback begins.
The PURE DIRECT indicator lights.

0 In Direct and Pure Direct sound modes, the following items cannot be adjusted.
0 Tone (v p. 138)
0 M-DAX (v p. 185)
0 MultEQ® XT32 (v p. 187)
0 Dynamic EQ (v p. 188)
0 Dynamic Volume (v p. 189)
0 Graphic EQ (v p. 191)
0 This can also be set by pressing PURE DIRECT on the main unit.

NOTE
0 Video signals are only output when HDMI signals are played in the Pure Direct
mode.
0 When the Pure Direct mode has been selected, the display turns off after about 5
seconds.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

144

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Auto surround playback
This mode detects the type of input digital signal, and automatically
selects the corresponding mode for playback.
Perform stereo playback when the input signal is PCM. When the input
signal is Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played back according to the
respective channel number.

Press PURE to select “Auto”.
Auto surround playback begins.

This can also be set by pressing PURE DIRECT on the main unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

145

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Description of sound mode types
Dolby sound mode
Sound mode type

Description

Dolby Surround

This mode uses Dolby Surround Upmixer to extend various sources to natural and realistic multi channels for playback.
Use ceiling speakers such as top middle speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.

Dolby Digital

This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby Digital.

Dolby TrueHD

This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby TrueHD.

Dolby Digital Plus

This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby Digital Plus.

Dolby Atmos

This mode can be selected when playing back content encoded with Dolby Atmos.
It decodes Dolby Atmos content and its positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers,
creating natural audio images regardless of the speaker layout. Use ceiling speakers and Dolby Enabled speakers to
realize a three-dimensional sound field.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

146

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

DTS sound mode
Sound mode type
DTS Neo:X

Description
This matrix decoding technology uses the DTS Neo:X decoder to playback 2-channel source or 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel
surround sources as a maximum of 11.1-channel surround sound.
The “Music” mode is suitable for playing music, the “Cinema” mode is suitable for playing movies and the “Game” mode is
suitable for playing games.

DTS Surround

This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS.

DTS ES Dscrt6.1z

This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES.
The surround back channel added using the discrete method is played as an independent channel.
Since all channels are independent, the 360-degree spacial expressiveness and sound localization are enhanced.

DTS ES Mtrix6.1z

This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES.
The surround back channel added to the surround-left and surround-right channels by a matrix encoder at software
recording time is decoded by this unit’s matrix decoder and played from each channel (surround left, surround right,
surround back).

DTS 96/24

This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS 96/24.

DTS-HD

This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS-HD.

DTS Express

This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS Express.

z This can be selected when “Speaker Config.” - “Surr. Back” is not set to “None”. (v p. 237)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

147

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

PCM multi-channel sound mode
Sound mode type
Multi Ch In
Audyssey

Description
This mode can be selected when playing multi-channel PCM/DSD sources.

DSX®

sound mode

Sound mode type
Audyssey

DSX®

(A-DSX)z

Description
This mode creates playback for the new channels (front wide or front height) in 5.1-channel systems. By adding front wide
or front height channels, the surround sound effects sound become more three dimensional and realistic.

z This can be selected when a setting other than “None” is selected for “Front Height” or “Front Wide”, and a setting other than “None” is selected for “Center” in “Speaker
Config.”. (v p. 236)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

148

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Original sound mode
Sound mode type

Description

Multi Ch Stereo

This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers.
Stereo audio (2-channel) sources are played back via the front (L/R) speakers, the surround speakers and surround back
speakers (if connected).

Virtual

This mode lets you experience an expansive surround sound effect when playing back through just the front (L/R)
speakers only, and when listening with stereo headphones.

Auto sound mode
Sound mode type
Auto

Front panel

Description
In this mode, the type of digital signal input, such as Dolby Digital, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DolbyDigital EX,
DTS, DTS-HD, DTS-ES, PCM (multi-channel) is detected, and the playback mode switches automatically to the
corresponding mode.
If the input signal is analog or PCM (2-channel), stereo playback is used. For Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played
back according to the respective channel number.

Display

Rear panel

149

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Stereo sound mode
Sound mode type
Stereo

Description
This mode plays 2-channel stereo audio with no additional surround sound processing.
0 Sound is output from the front left and right speakers, and subwoofer if connected.
0 When multi-channel signals are inputted, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio and are played back with no
additional surround sound processing.

Direct sound mode
Sound mode type

Description

Direct

This mode plays back audio as recorded in the source.

Pure Direct

This mode plays back an even higher quality sound than the “Direct” mode.
The following circuits are stopped in order to further improve sound quality.
0 Display indicator circuit of the main body (display will go off.)
0 The analog video input/output switcher and processor is disabled.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

150

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal
0 The following sound modes can be selected using the MOVIE, MUSIC and GAME buttons.

0 Adjust the sound field effect with the menu “Surround Parameter” to enjoy surround sound the way you like it. (v p. 182)
Input signal

Sound mode
Dolby Surround
DTS Neo:X Cinema z2

2-channel z1

Sound mode
MUSIC
S

MOVIE
S
S

GAME
S

DTS Neo:X Music z2

DTS Neo:X Game z2
Multi Ch Stereo
Virtual

S
S

z1 2-channel also includes analog input.
z2 This mode plays back 2-channel sources in 5.1, 7.1 or 9.1-channel playback. It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when only front speakers are used.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

151

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Input signal
Multi-channel z3

Dolby Digital

Dolby TrueHD

Playback

Settings

Sound mode

Sound mode
MUSIC
S
S
S
S

MOVIE
S
S
S
S
S

Stereo
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital + Dolby Surround
Dolby Digital A-DSX z4
Dolby Digital + Neo:X Cinema
Dolby Digital + Neo:X Music
Dolby Digital + Neo:X Game
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD + Dolby Surroundz5
Dolby Atmosz6
Dolby TrueHD A-DSX z4
Dolby TrueHD + Neo:X Cinema
Dolby TrueHD + Neo:X Music
Dolby TrueHD + Neo:X Game

Tips

Appendix
GAME
S
S
S
S

S
S
S
S
S
S

S
S
S
S
S

z3 Some sound modes cannot be selected depending on the audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For details, see “Types of input signals, and
corresponding sound modes” (v p. 314).
z4 These modes add new channels to 5.1-channel surround using Audyssey DSX® processing. (v p. 190)
z5 This can be selected when the input signal does not contain Dolby Atmos.
z6 This can be selected when the input signal contains Dolby Atmos.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

152

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Input signal

Multi-channel z3

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Atmos

DTS

Playback

Settings

Sound mode

Sound mode
MUSIC
S
S
S
S

MOVIE
S
S
S
S
S

Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus + Dolby Surroundz5
Dolby Atmosz6
Dolby Digital Plus A-DSX z4
Dolby Digital Plus + Neo:X Cinema
Dolby Digital Plus + Neo:X Music
Dolby Digital Plus + Neo:X Game
Dolby Atmos
DTS Surround
DTS ES Dscrt 6.1
DTS ES Mtrx 6.1
DTS 96/24
DTS + Dolby Surround
DTS Surround A-DSX z4
DTS + Neo:X Cinema
DTS + Neo:X Music
DTS + Neo:X Game

Tips

Appendix
GAME
S
S
S
S

S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S

S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

153

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Input signal

Multi-channel z3

DTS-HD /
DTS Express

PCM multi-channel

Playback

Settings

Sound mode

Sound mode
MUSIC
S
S
S
S
S
S
S

MOVIE
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S

DTS-HD Hi Res
DTS-HD Mstr
DTS-HD Mstr A-DSX z4
DTS Express
DTS Express A-DSX z4
DTS-HD + Dolby Surround
DTS-HD HI Res A-DSX z4
DTS-HD + Neo:X Cinema
DTS-HD + Neo:X Music
DTS-HD + Neo:X Game
Multi Ch In
Multi Ch In 7.1
Multi In + Dolby Surround
Multi In A-DSX z4
Multi In + Neo:X Cinema
Multi In + Neo:X Music
Multi In + Neo:X Game
Multi Ch Stereo
Virtual

Tips

S
S
S
S
S
S

Appendix
GAME
S
S
S
S
S
S

S
S
S
S
S
S

S
S
S
S
S

S
S

S
S
S

S
S

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

154

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o Views on the display

Blu-ray
Dolby D +
S

A Shows a decoder to be used.
0 In the case of the Dolby Digital Plus decoder, “Dolby D +” is
displayed.
B Shows a decoder that creates sound output.
0 “k” indicates that the Dolby Surround decoder is being used.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

155

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

HDMI control function
A recent addition to the HDMI standard is CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows control signals from one device to communicate with
another device via the HDMI cable connection.

Setting procedure

1
2
3

Enable the HDMI control function of this unit.
Set “HDMI Control” to “On”. (v p. 197)

Turn the power on for all the devices connected by
HDMI cable.

Set the HDMI control function for all devices connected
by HDMI cable.

0 Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV or player. Check
the owner’s manual of each device for details beforehand.
0 The HDMI ZONE2 function is not compatible with the HDMI control function.
0 When the HDMI ZONE2 function is used with “HDMI Control” in the menu set to
“On”, the HDMI ZONE2 function may not fully work.

devices to check the settings.

0 Carry out steps 2 and 3 should any of the devices be unplugged.

Switch the television input to the HDMI input connected
to this unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

When you turn the TV’s power to standby, check that
the power of this unit also goes to standby.

NOTE

0 Please consult the operating instructions for the connected

Switch the input source of this unit to check that video
from the player connected by HDMI is played back
correctly.

156

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Sleep timer function
You can have the power automatically switched to standby once a set time
has elapsed. This is convenient for viewing and listening while going to
sleep. The sleep timer function can be set for each zone.

ZONE SELECT

SLEEP

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

157

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Appendix

o Checking the remaining time

Using the sleep timer

Tips

Press SLEEP when the sleep timer is in operation.
The remaining time appears on the display.

Press ZONE SELECT to switch “MAIN”, “ZONE2” or
“ZONE3”.

o To cancel the sleep timer
Press SLEEP to select “Off”.
The sleep timer indicator on the display turns off.

Press SLEEP and display the time you want to set.
0 The sleep timer indicator lights up on the display and the sleep

timer starts.

0 You can set the sleep timer in the range from 10 to 120 minutes in

The sleep timer setting is canceled when the unit switches to standby mode.

steps of 10 minutes.

NOTE
The sleep timer function cannot turn off the power of devices connected to this unit.
To turn off the power of those connected devices, set up sleep timers on the
connected devices themselves.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

158

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Smart select function
Settings such as the input source, volume level and sound mode can be
registered to the SMART SELECT 1 - 4 buttons.
You can simply press one of the registered SMART SELECT buttons in
subsequent playbacks to switch to the group of saved settings in a batch.
By saving frequently used settings at the SMART SELECT 1 – 4 buttons,
you will always be able to easily call up the same playback environment.
The Smart Select function can be memorized for each zone.

ZONE
SELECT

SMART
SELECT
1–4

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

159

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Calling up the settings

1
2

Press ZONE SELECT to switch “MAIN”, “ZONE2” or
“ZONE3”.
Press SMART SELECT.
The Smart Select settings registered to the button you pressed are
called up.
0 The default settings for the input source and volume are as shown

below.

GMAIN ZONEH
Button

Input source

Volume

SMART SELECT 1

CBL/SAT

SMART SELECT 2

Blu-ray

SMART SELECT 3

Media Player

SMART SELECT 4

Online Music

GZONE2H / GZONE3H
Button

Input source

Volume

SMART SELECT 1

CBL/SAT

SMART SELECT 2

Blu-ray

SMART SELECT 3

Media Player

SMART SELECT 4

Online Music

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

160

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Changing the settings

Set the items below to the settings you want to
register.

The following settings from A to I can be memorized for MAIN
ZONE, and settings A and B can be memorized for ZONE2 and
ZONE3.

Tips

Press ZONE SELECT to switch “MAIN”, “ZONE2” or
“ZONE3”.
Press and hold the desired SMART SELECT until
“Smartz Memory”, “Z2 Smartz Memory” or “Z3
Smartz Memory” appears on the display.

The current settings will be memorized.
z is displayed the number for the SMART SELECT button you
pressed.

A Input source (v p. 79)
B Volume (v p. 80)
C Sound mode (v p. 142)
D Audyssey (Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®,
Audyssey Dynamic Volume®, Audyssey LFC™) (v p. 187 189)
E “M-DAX” (v p. 185)
F “Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 137)
G “Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 139)
H “Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment
(Picture Mode)” (v p. 140)
I “Video Output” (v p. 196)

o Changing the Smart Select Name
The MAIN ZONE Smart Select name displayed on the TV screen or
display of this unit can be changed to a different name.
For the name change method, see “Smart Select
Names” (v p. 258).

Press and hold SMART SELECT while a radio station is being received or a
track is being played back with any of the following sources, the current radio
station or track is memorized.
0 HD Radio / Internet Radio / Media Server / Pandora / SiriusXM / Favorites /
iPod/USB

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

161

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Web control function
You can control this unit from a web control screen on a web browser.
.

Controlling the unit from a web control

PC
This unit

2
Router

Switch the “IP Control” setting to “Always On”.
(v p. 251)
Check the IP address of this unit with “Information”.
(v p. 247)
Network/Information
Friendly name
DHCP
Connection
IP Address
MAC Address

Ｍarantz SR7009
On
Wired (Ethernet)
192.168.100.19
zzzzzz-000000

Checking the IP address.
Displays the current network settings of the AVR

Tablet

0 This unit and the PC or tablet need to be connected correctly to the network in
order to use the web control function. (“Connecting to a home network
(LAN)” (v p. 73))
0 Depending on the settings of your security-related software, you may not be able
to access this unit from your PC. If this is the case, then change the settings of the
security-related software.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

162

Start up the web browser.

Remote

Index

Contents

Playback

Settings

Enter the IP address of this unit in browser’s address
box.

For example, if the IP address of this unit is “192.168.100.19”, enter
“http://192.168.100.19”.

Tips

SR7009

Setup Menu
MAIN ZONE
CBL/SAT

Audio

http://192.168.100.19
File

Edit View

Appendix

When the top menu is displayed, click on the menu
item you want to operate.

Video

Favorites Tools Help

ZONE2
Online Music

Inputs

ZONE3
CBL/SAT

Speakers
Network
General

SR7009

Save

Load

Connections

0 You can use the “Save” and “Load” functions to store or recall various function
settings using web control from a PC.
0 To memorize settings, click “Save” on the Setup Menu screen.
0 To call up settings, click “Load” on the Setup Menu screen.
0 We recommend using one of the following web browsers.
Internet Explorer 10 and above
Mozilla Firefox 24 and above
Google Chrome 29 and above
Safari 5.x and above

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

163

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Panel lock function
To prevent accidental operation of this unit, you can disable operation of
the buttons on the front panel.

Disabling all key button operations

ui ENTER

2
3

Display

Use u or i to select “P/V LOCK On”.
Press ENTER to enter the setting.
All button operations except X are disabled.

Disabling all button operations except
VOLUME

BACK

Front panel

Press X while you press and hold BACK and ENTER
with the unit in standby mode.

Rear panel

164

Press X while you press and hold BACK and ENTER
with the unit in standby mode.
Use u or i to select “FP LOCK On”.
Press ENTER to enter the setting.
All button operations except X and VOLUME are disabled.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Canceling the Panel lock function

1
2
3

Press X while you press and hold BACK and ENTER
with the unit in standby mode.
Use u or i to select “FP LOCK zOff”.
(z The currently set mode.)

Press ENTER to enter the setting.
The Panel lock function is canceled.

Even when the Panel lock function is set, you can operate the unit using the remote
control unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

165

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Remote lock function
When connecting an IR receiver, enable the Remote lock function. When
the function is enabled, you can not perform operations with the remote
control unit.
By default, this function is disabled.

Disabling the sensor function of the
remote control unit

ui ENTER

2
3

Press X while you press and hold BACK and ENTER
with the unit in standby mode.
Use u or i to select “RC LOCK On”.
Press ENTER to enter the setting.

Enabling the remote sensor function
.

BACK

1
2
3

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

166

Press X while you press and hold BACK and ENTER
with the unit in standby mode.
Use u or i to select “RC LOCK zOff”.
(z The currently set mode.)

Press ENTER to enter the setting.
Infrared light receiving function on the main unit is enabled.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Switches light illumination on/off
You can switch the light illumination around the main display on or off.
The default setting is “On”.

Light illumination

Press and hold DIMMER on the main unit for 3
seconds.

0 Carry out the same procedure if you want to change the settings

again.

DIMMER

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

167

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room)
You can operate this unit to enjoy video and audio in a room (ZONE2 and ZONE3) that is different from the room where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE).
You can simultaneously play back the same source in both the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3. You can also play back separate sources in the MAIN
ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3.

Connecting ZONE
You can use the following three methods to play back video and audio in
ZONE2 and ZONE3.
0 Connection through the HDMI ZONE2 connector (v p. 168)
0 Connection through the video output connector and speaker output
connector (v p. 169)
0 Connection through the video output connector and external power
amplifiers (v p. 171)

o Connection 1 : Connection through the HDMI
ZONE2 connector
When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, you can
play back a video or audio from the device connected to the HDMI 1 –
7 IN connector in ZONE2 (HDMI ZONE2 function).

ZONE2

MAIN ZONE
HDMI
ZONE2

HDMI

When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, and the MAIN ZONE
and ZONE2 are set to the same input source, the MAIN ZONE audio may be mixed
down to 2-channel audio.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

168

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Connection 2 : Connection through the video output connector and speaker output connector
When “Assign Mode” in the menu is set to any of the following audio is output from speakers in ZONE2 or ZONE3. (v p. 221)

n Assign Mode: 7.1ch + ZONE2

n Assign Mode: 7.1ch + ZONE3

MAIN ZONE
This unit

ZONE2

ZONE3

MAIN ZONE
This unit

VIDEO

(L)

COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
Y
PB PR

w
.

VIDEO
IN

(L)
q

(R)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

169

Remote

Index

(R)
qw

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n Assign Mode: 7.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO
MAIN ZONE
This unit

ZONE2

ZONE3

VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
Y
PB PR

VIDEO
IN

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

170

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Connection 3 : Connection through the video output connector and external power amplifiers
The audio signals of this unit’s ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors are played on the ZONE2 and ZONE3 power amplifiers.

ZONE2

MAIN ZONE

ZONE3

VIDEO
VIDEO
IN

This unit

COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
Y
PB PR

Power amplifier
AUX IN

Power amplifier
L
R

AUX IN

L
R

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

171

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 The analog audio signal and the 2-channel PCM signal input from HDMI connector or digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) can be played back in ZONE2.
0 If you want to play back HDMI signals other than 2-channel PCM in ZONE2, set “HDMI Audio” to “PCM”. (v p. 256) 2-channel PCM signals are output from a device
connected to the input source selected for ZONE2 and can be played back in ZONE2.
In this case, the MAIN ZONE audio will also be converted to 2-channel PCM signals if the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 are set to the same input source. However, depending on
the playback device, the playback signal may not be converted to PCM even if this setting is configured.
0 The analog audio signal and the 2-channel PCM signal input from digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) can be played back in ZONE3.
0 When “Component Video Out” in the menu is set to “ZONE2”, the component video output connector outputs the ZONE2 video. (v p. 203)
0 The menu screen is not output in ZONE2.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

172

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3
.

1
2
POWER X

ZONE SELECT

Appendix

Press ZONE SELECT to switch “ZONE2” or “ZONE3”.
Press POWER X to turn on the ZONE2 or ZONE3 power.
The multi zone power indicator on the display lights.
0 Power in ZONE2 or ZONE3 can be turned on or off by pressing
ZONE2 ON/OFF or ZONE3 ON/OFF on the main unit.

Press the input source select button to select the input
source to be played.

The audio signal of the selected source is output to ZONE2 or
ZONE3.
0 To perform an operation with the main unit, press ZONE
SELECT. Each time you press ZONE SELECT, the input source
changes.

Input source
select buttons

VOLUME df

MUTE :

Front panel

Tips

Display

Rear panel

173

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o Adjusting the volume
Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume.
0 At time of purchase, “Volume Limit” is set to “70 (–10 dB)”.
(v p. 257)
Turn VOLUME after pressing ZONE SELECT on the main unit to adjust the
volume.

o Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)
Press MUTE :.
The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” in the menu.
(v p. 257)
0 To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE :
again.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

174

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Menu map
When using menu operations, connect this unit to a TV and operate this unit while viewing the TV.
The recommended settings are configured for this unit by default. You can customize this unit based on your existing system and your preferences.
Detailed items

Description

Page

Dialog Level Adjust

This setting adjusts the output level to clarify the dialogue output from the center
channel.

181

Subwoofer Level Adjust

This setting adjusts the volume level for the subwoofer.

181

Surround Parameter

Adjusts surround sound parameters.

182

M-DAX

Expands the low and high frequency components of compressed audio content such as
MP3 files to enable richer audio playback.

185

Audio Delay

Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio.

186

Volume

Sets the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.

Setting items

Audio

Video

Front panel

186

Audyssey

Set Audyssey
XT32, Audyssey Dynamic
Audyssey LFCTM and Audyssey DSX®.

Graphic EQ

Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.

191

Picture Adjust

Adjusts picture quality.

193

HDMI Setup

Makes settings for HDMI video/audio output.

195

Output Settings

Makes settings for video output.

199

Component Video Out

Sets whether to use the component video output connector for MAIN ZONE or ZONE2.

203

On Screen Display

Configures the on-screen display settings.

204

TV Format

Sets the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.

205

Display

MultEQ®

Rear panel

175

Remote

EQ®,

Audyssey Dynamic

Index

Volume®,

187

Contents

Setting items

Inputs

Connections

Playback

Settings

Detailed items

Tips

Appendix

Description

Page

Input Assign

Changes input connector assignment.

206

Source Rename

Changes the display name for input source.

208

Hide Sources

Removes from the display input sources that are not used.

208

Source Level

Adjusts the playback level of the audio input.

208

Input Select

Sets the audio input mode and decode mode.

209

Audyssey® Setup

The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are
measured and the optimum settings are made automatically.

210

Manual Setup

Sets up the speakers manually or changes the Audyssey® Setup settings.

221

Information

Displays network information.

247

Connection

Selects whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a wired LAN.

247

Settings

Used for manually setting the IP address or when using a proxy server.

250

IP Control

Enables network communication in standby power mode.

251

Friendly Name

The “Friendly Name” is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You can change
the Friendly Name according to your preferences.

252

Diagnostics

Used to check the network connection.

252

Maintenance Mode

Used when receiving maintenance from a Marantz service engineer or custom installer.
This mode is not designed for use by the end user, and should only be used by a trained
service technician or custom installation professional.

253

.
Speakers

Network

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

176

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Setting items

Playback

Settings

Detailed items

Tips

Appendix

Description

Page

Changes the language of the display on the TV screen.

254

ECO

Configures the ECO Mode and Auto Standby energy-saving functions.

254

ZONE2 Setup/
ZONE3 Setup

Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2 and ZONE3.

256

Zone Rename

Changes the display title of each zone to one you prefer.

258

Smart Select Names

Changes the Smart Select Name display title to one you prefer.

Trigger Out 1/
Trigger Out 2

Select the conditions for activating trigger out function.

258

Front Display

Makes settings related to the display on this unit.

259

Information

Shows information about this unit settings, input signals, etc.

259

Usage Data

Selects whether or not to send anonymous usage data to Marantz.

261

Firmware

Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades, updates the
firmware, and sets up the notification message display.

262

Setup Lock

Protects settings from inadvertent changes.

Begin Setup...

Performs basic installation/connections/settings from the beginning according to the
guidance indicated on the TV screen.

Language Select

Sets individual setting items according to the guidance displayed on the TV screen.

Language

General

264

Speaker Setup

.
Setup Assistant Speaker Calibration
Network Setup
Input Setup

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

177

Remote

Index

Page 9 of
the separate
manual
“Quick Start
Guide”

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Menu operations

1
2

ZONE SELECT

3
4
5

uio p
ENTER

Press ZONE SELECT to switch “MAIN”.
Press SETUP.
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.

Use ui p to select the menu to be set or operated,
then press ENTER.
Use o p to change to desired setting.
Press ENTER to enter the setting.
0 To return to the previous item, press BACK.

0 Exiting the Menu, press SETUP while the menu is displayed. The

menu display disappears.

SETUP

BACK

0–9

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

178

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Inputting characters
On this unit, you can change the name displayed on the following screens to the names that you prefer.
0 Preset Name (v p. 101)
0 Text Search (v p. 134)
0 Source Rename (v p. 208)
0 Friendly Name (v p. 252)
0 Zone Rename (v p. 258)
0 Smart Select Names (v p. 258)
0 Character input for the network functions

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

179

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Using the keyboard screen
Display the screen for inputting characters.
GExampleH “Source Rename” screen

Inputs/Source Rename
CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

Clear

Insert

Delete

A B C D E

F G H

N O P Q R

L M

T U V W X Y
!

$ % &

< = >

a/A

‘

(

)

* +

Space

;

Cancel

“

5
6

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Changes the display name for this source

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

180

Appendix

Use uio p to select , or ..
Press ENTER to move the cursor to the character that
you wish to change.
0 Each time ENTER is pressed, the cursor moves by one
character.
Select a character to be input with uio p then press
ENTER.
Repeat steps 2 - 4 to change the name.
Use uio p to select “OK”, then press ENTER.

2
3

Tips

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Audio
Make audio-related settings.

Subwoofer Level Adjust

Dialog Level Adjust

This setting adjusts the volume level for the subwoofer.

This setting adjusts the output level to clarify the dialogue output from the
center channel.

o Subwoofer Level Adjust

o Dialog Level Adjust

Set whether to adjust the subwoofer level.

Set whether to adjust the dialog level or not.
On:

Enables the adjustment of the dialog
level.

Off
(Default):

Disables the adjustment of the dialog
level.

o Level

On:

Enables the adjustment of the subwoofer
level.

Off
(Default):

Disables the adjustment of the subwoofer
level.

This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.

Adjusts the volume output from the center channel.
–12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)

This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

181

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Loudness Management

Surround Parameter

This sets whether to output as specified in “Dynamic Compression” or
output directly without compressing the dynamic range of audio
recorded in the disc.

You can adjust the surround audio sound field effects to match your
preferences.
The items (parameters) that can be adjusted depend on the signal being
input and the currently set sound mode. For details on the adjustable
parameters, see “Sound modes and surround parameters” (v p. 311).
0 Some setting items cannot be set while playback is stopped. Make the settings
during playback.
0 “Surround Parameter” settings are stored for each sound mode.

On
(Default):

Outputs are given based on enabling the
settings made in “Dynamic Compression”
and “Dialog normalization function”
(v p. 259).

Off:

“Dynamic Compression” settings and
“Dialogue Normalization” are disabled,
and the signals on the disc are output as
is.

o Cinema EQ
Gently softens the upper treble range of movie soundtracks to reduce
possible harshness and improve clarity.
On:

“Cinema EQ” is used.

Off
(Default):

“Cinema EQ” is not used.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

“Loudness Management” can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus or
Dolby TrueHD signal is input.

182

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Low Frequency Effects

o Dynamic Compression

Adjust the low frequency effects level (LFE).

Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).
Auto:

Automatic dynamic range compression
on/off control according to source.

Low / Medium / High:

These set the compression level.

Off:

Dynamic range compression is always off.

n When “Input Mode” is set other than to “7.1CH IN”
-10 dB – 0 dB (Default : 0 dB)

n When “Input Mode” is set to “7.1CH IN”
0 dB / +5 dB / +10 dB / +15 dB (Default: +10 dB)

0 “Dynamic Compression” can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus or
Dolby TrueHD signal is input.
0 The default setting is “Off”. When the input signal is the Dolby TrueHD or
Dolby Atmos source, the default setting is “Auto”.

For proper playback of the different sources, we recommend setting to the
values below.
0 Dolby Digital sources : 0 dB
0 DTS movie sources : 0 dB
0 DTS music sources: -10 dB

o Center Gain
Distributes the dialogue output from the center channel to the front left
and right channels and widens the sound image in the front.
0.0 – 1.0

0 You can set this when the sound mode is set to DTS Neo:X.
0 The smaller the value, the more dialogue is concentrated on the center
channel. The larger the value, the more dialogue is distributed to front left and
right channels, and the more the sound image widens in the front.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

183

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Speaker Select

Tips

Appendix

n When the sound mode is the original sound mode

Makes settings for the speakers outputting sound.

n When the sound mode is “DTS Neo:X”.
Surround Back: Sound is output from the surround back speakers.
Height:

Sound is output from the front height speakers.

Wide:

Sound is output from the front wide speakers.

Back/Height:

Sound is output from the surround back and front
height speakers.

Back/Wide:

Sound is output from the surround back and front
wide speakers.

Height/Wide:

Sound is output from the front height and front wide
speakers.

Floor
(Default):

Plays back without height speakers.

Floor & Height:

Plays back with height speakers.

Front:

Plays back only with speakers in front of the
surround speaker.

o Subwoofer
Turn subwoofer output on and off.
On
(Default):

The subwoofer is used.

Off:

The subwoofer is not used.

You can set this when the sound mode is “Direct” or “Stereo” and in the menu
“Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE+Main”. (v p. 243)

This can be selected when using any of the surround back, front wide or front
height speakers.

o Set Defaults
The “Surround Parameter” settings are returned to the default settings.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

184

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

M-DAX
0 The M-DAX indicator lights.
0 This item can be set with analog signals or PCM signal (Sample Rate =
44.1/48 kHz) is input.
0 This item default setting for “Online Music”, “iPod/USB” and “Bluetooth” is
“Low”. All others are set to “Off”.
0 This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.
0 This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.
0 “M-DAX” settings are stored for each input source.
0 This can also be set by pressing M-DAX on the main unit.
0 This can be set by pressing M-DAX on the main unit.

Compressed audio formats such as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio)
and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal
components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The “M-DAX”
function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the
sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression.
It also restores the original bass characteristics for a rich and expanded
tonal range.

o Mode
High:

Optimized mode for compressed sources with very weak
highs (64 kbps and under).

Medium:

Apply suitable bass and treble boost for all compressed
sources (96 kbps and under).

Low:

Optimized mode for compressed sources with normal highs
(96 kbps and over).

Off:

Do no use “M-DAX”.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

185

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o Limit

Audio Delay

Make a setting for maximum volume.

Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio.

60 (–20 dB) / 70 (–10 dB) / 80 (0 dB)

0 ms – 200 ms (Default : 0 ms)

Off (Default)

o Power On Level

0 Audio Delay for game mode can be set when “Video Mode” is set to “Auto” or
“Game”. (v p. 199)
0 This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.
0 “Audio Delay” settings are stored for each input source.

Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.

Volume
Set the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.

o Scale

Last
(Default):

Use the memorized setting from the last
session.

Mute:

Always use the muting on condition when
power is turned on.

1 – 98 (–79 dB – 18 dB) :

The volume is adjusted to the set level.

o Mute Level

Set how volume is displayed.

Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.

0 - 98
(Default):

Display in the range 0 (Min) to 98.

–79.5 dB – 18.0 dB:

Display ---dB (Min), in the range –79.5 dB
to 18.0 dB.

Full
(Default):

The sound is muted entirely.

–40 dB :

The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.

–20 dB :

The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.

“Scale” settings are reflected in all the zones.

Front panel

Appendix

Display

Rear panel

186

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o MultEQ® XT32

Audyssey

MultEQ® XT32 compensates for both time and frequency
characteristics of the listening area based on Audyssey® Setup
measurement results. Selection is done from three types of
compensation curves. It is recommended that “Reference” is selected.

Set Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey
Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFC™. These can be selected after
Audyssey® Setup has been performed.
For additional information on Audyssey technology, please see
“Explanation of terms” (v p. 317).

0 “MultEQ® XT32”, “Dynamic EQ”, “Reference Level Offset”, “Dynamic Volume”,
“Audyssey LFC™”, “Containment Amount” and “Audyssey DSX®” settings are
stored for each input source.
0 When the sound mode is in the “Direct” or “Pure Direct” mode, “MultEQ® XT32”,
“Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” settings cannot be configured.
0 This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.

Reference
(Default):

Selects the default calibrated setting with
a slight roll off at high frequencies, which
is optimized for movies.

L/R Bypass:

Selects the reference setting, but
bypasses MultEQ® XT32 on the front left
and right speakers.

Flat:

Selects the calibrated setting which is
optimized for small rooms where your
listening position is closer to the
speakers.

Off :

Turn “MultEQ® XT32” equalizer off.

When the headphones are used, “MultEQ® XT32” is automatically set to “Off”.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

187

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Dynamic EQ

Tips

Appendix

o Reference Level Offset

Solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is
decreased by taking into account human perception and room
acoustics.
Works with MultEQ® XT32.
On
(Default):

Use Dynamic EQ.

Off:

Do not use Dynamic EQ.

Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is referenced to the standard film mix level. It
makes adjustments to maintain the reference response and surround
envelopment when the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However,
film reference level is not always used in music or other non-film
content. Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset provides three offsets
from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be
selected when the mix level of the content is not within the standard.
Recommended setting levels for content are shown below.
0 dB (Film Reference)
(Default):

0 When the menu “Dynamic EQ” setting is “On”, it is not possible to do “Tone
Control” adjustment. (v p. 138)
0 This can be set by pressing DYNAMIC EQ on the main unit.

5 dB :

10 dB :

15 dB :

Optimized for content such as
movies.
Select this setting for content that has
a very wide dynamic range, such as
classical music.
Select this setting for jazz or other
music that has a wider dynamic
range. This setting should also be
selected for TV content as that is
usually mixed at 10 dB below film
reference.
Select this setting for pop/rock music
or other program material that is
mixed at very high listening levels
and has a compressed dynamic
range.

Setting is enabled when “Dynamic EQ” is “On”. (v p. 188)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

188

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Dynamic Volume

Tips

Appendix

o Audyssey LFC™

Solves the problem of large variations in volume level between TV,
movies and other content (between quiet passages and loud
passages, etc.) by automatically adjusting to the user’s preferred
volume setting.
Heavy:

Most adjustment to softest and loudest
sounds.

Medium:

Medium adjustment to loudest and
softest sound.

Light:

Least adjustment to loudest and softest
sounds.

Off
(Default):

Do not use Dynamic Volume.

Adjusts the low frequency band to prevent bass and vibration from
being conveyed to neighboring rooms.
On:

Use “Audyssey LFC™”.

Off
(Default):

Do not use “Audyssey LFC™”.

o Containment Amount
Adjusts the amount of low frequency containment. Use higher settings
if you have close neighbors.
1 – 7 (Default : 4)

This can be set when “Audyssey LFC™” in the menu is set to “On”.
0 If “Dynamic Volume” is set to “Yes” in “Audyssey® Setup”, the setting is
automatically changed to “Medium”. (v p. 210)
0 This can be set by pressing DYNAMIC VOLUME on the main unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

189

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o Stage Width

o Audyssey DSX®

Adjust sound stage width when using front wide speakers.

Provides more immersive surround sound by adding the new
channels.
Wide:

Turn on Audyssey DSX® processing for front wide
channel expansion.

Height:

Turn on Audyssey DSX® processing for front height
channel expansion.

Wides/Heights:

Turns on Audyssey DSX® processing for front wide
and front height channel expansion.

Off
(Default):

Do not set “Audyssey DSX®”.

–10 – +10 (Default : 0)

o Stage Height
Adjust sound stage height when using front height speakers.
–10 – +10 (Default : 0)

0 “Audyssey DSX®” can be set when you are using front height speakers or front
wide speakers.
0 “Audyssey DSX®” is only valid when using a center speaker.
0 When 2-channel signals are being played back, “Audyssey DSX®” cannot be
used.
0 “Audyssey DSX®” cannot be configured if the HD Audio source being played
includes Front height and Front wide channels. In this case, the respective
channels are played back using the input signals.
0 This can be set by pressing A-DSX on the main unit.

Front panel

Appendix

Display

Rear panel

190

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Speaker Selection

Graphic EQ

Select whether to adjust tones for individual speakers or for all
speakers.

Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.
0 Speakers for which “Graphic EQ” can be set differ according to the sound mode.
0 This can be set when the “MultEQ® XT32” is set to “Off”. (v p. 187)
0 This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.
0 This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.

All:

Adjust all speaker tones together.

Left/Right
(Default):

Adjust the left and right speaker tones
together.

Each:

Adjust the tone for each speaker.

o Adjust EQ

o Graphic EQ

Adjust tonal balance for each frequency band. Adjust the speaker
selected in “Speaker Selection”.

Set whether to use the graphic equalizer or not.
On:

Use the graphic equalizer.

Off
(Default):

Do not use the graphic equalizer.

1. Select the speaker.
2. Select the adjustment frequency band.
63 Hz / 125 Hz / 250 Hz / 500 Hz / 1 kHz / 2 kHz / 4 kHz / 8 kHz /
16 kHz
3. Adjust the level.
–20.0 dB – +6.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)

Front Dolby, Surround Dolby and Back Dolby speakers can only be set when 63
Hz/125 Hz/250 Hz/500 Hz/1 kHz.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

191

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o Curve Copy
Copy the Flat correction curve created in the Audyssey® Setup.

“Curve Copy” is displayed after Audyssey® Setup has been performed.

o Set Defaults
The “Graphic EQ” settings are returned to the default settings.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

192

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Video
Make video-related settings.

o Picture Mode

Picture Adjust

Select the desired picture mode according to the video content and
your viewing environment.

Picture quality can be adjusted.
0 Can be set when the “Video Conversion” setting is “On”. (v p. 200)
0 Can be set when “HDMI”, “COMP” or “VIDEO” is assigned for each input source.
(v p. 207)
0 “Contrast”, “Brightness”, “Saturation”, “Noise Reduction” and “Enhancer” can be
set when “Picture Mode” is set to “Custom”.
0 “Picture Adjust” settings are stored for each input source.
0 “Picture Adjust” cannot be set when 4K signals are input.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Standard:

The standard mode suited for most living room viewing
environments.

Movie:

A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room such
as a theater room.

Vivid:

A mode that makes graphic images for games, etc.
brighter and more vivid.

Streaming: A mode suited for low bit rate video sources.

193

ISF Day:

A mode suited for watching movies in a bright room
during the day.

ISF Night:

A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room at
night.

Custom:

Adjusts the picture quality manually.

Off:

No picture quality adjustment is done with this unit.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o Contrast
Adjust picture contrast.

0 The two special adjustment modes, ISF Day and ISF Night, should be used by
a certified technician to adjust the color calibration to match the installation
conditions.
We recommend that the settings and adjustments be carried out by an ISFcertified technician.
0 These settings can also be configured using “Picture Mode” in the option
menu. (v p. 140)
0 The default settings are as follows.
0 For “Online Music” and “iPod/USB” input sources: Streaming
0 For input sources other than “Online Music” and “iPod/USB”: Off

-50 – +50 (Default : 0)

o Brightness
Adjust picture brightness.
-50 – +50 (Default : 0)

o Saturation
Adjust picture chroma level (color saturation).
-50 – +50 (Default : 0)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

194

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Noise Reduction

Tips

Appendix

HDMI Setup

Reduce overall video noise.

Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.

Low / Medium / High / Off (Default : Off)

NOTE

o Enhancer

When “HDMI Pass Through” and “HDMI Control” is set to “On”, it consumes more
standby power. If you are not using this unit for an extended period, it is
recommended that you unplug the power cord from the power outlet.

Emphasize picture sharpness.
0 – +12 (Default : 0)

o Auto Lip Sync
Make automatic compensation for timing shift in audio and video
output.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

195

On
(Default):

Correct automatically.

Off:

Do not correct automatically.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o HDMI Audio Out

Tips

Appendix

o Video Output

Select HDMI audio output device.

Select the HDMI monitor connector to be used.

AVR
(Default):

Play back through speakers connected to
the unit.

TV:

Play back through TV connected to the
unit.

0 When the HDMI control function is activated, priority is given to the TV audio
setting. (“HDMI control function” (v p. 156))
0 When the power of this unit is on and “HDMI Audio Out” is set to “TV”, audio is
output as 2-channel from the HDMI OUT connector.

Auto(Dual)
(Default):

The presence of a TV connected to the
HDMI MONITOR 1 or HDMI MONITOR 2
connector is detected automatically, and
that TV connection is used.

Monitor 1:

A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR
1 connector is always used.

Monitor 2:

A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR
2 connector is always used.

0 If both the HDMI MONITOR1 and HDMI MONITOR2 connectors are
connected and “Resolution” is set to “Auto”, the signals are output with a
resolution that is compatible with both TVs. When “Resolution” is not set to
“Auto”, video may not be output. In this case, set a resolution that is
compatible with both TVs. (v p. 201)
You can check which resolutions are compatible with your TV in “HDMI
Monitor 1” and “HDMI Monitor 2”. (v p. 260)
0 This can be set by pressing HDMI OUT on the main unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

196

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o HDMI Pass Through

Tips

Appendix

o HDMI Control

Selects how this unit will transmit HDMI signals to the HDMI output in
standby power mode.
On
(Default):

Transmits the selected HDMI input
through the AV receiver’s HDMI output
when this unit is in standby power mode.

Off:

No HDMI signals are transmitted through
this unit’s HDMI output in standby power
mode.

You can link operations with devices connected to HDMI and
compatible with HDMI Control.
On:

Use HDMI control function.

Off
(Default):

Do not use HDMI control function.

0 Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device to check
the settings.
0 Refer to “HDMI control function” for more information about the HDMI control
function. (v p. 156)

NOTE
If the “HDMI Control” settings have been changed, always reset the power to
connected devices after the change.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

197

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Pass Through Source

Tips

Appendix

o TV Audio Switching

Sets the HDMI connector that inputs HDMI signals when in standby.
Last:

The most recently used input source will
go into standby mode.

CBL/SAT / DVD /
Blu-ray / Game /
AUX1 / AUX2 /
Media Player / CDz
(Default : CBL/SAT):

Pass through the selected input source.

Sets automatic switching to the “TV Audio” input when a TV connected
via HDMI sends an appropriate CEC control command to the AVR.

z“Pass Through Source” can be set when any of the HDMI
connectors is assigned to “CD” for the input source in the “Input
Assign” setting. (v p. 206)

On
(Default):

Select the “TV Audio” input automatically
when receiving a command from the TV.

Off:

Do not select the “TV Audio” input
automatically when receiving a command
from the TV.

“TV Audio Switching” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

o Power Off Control
Links the power standby of this unit to external devices.

“Pass Through Source” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On” or “HDMI
Pass Through” is set to “On”.

All
(Default):

If power to a connected TV is turned off
independently of the input source, power
to this unit is automatically set to standby.

Video:

With an input source being selected that
is assigned either “HDMI”, “COMP” or
“VIDEO”, when you turn the power of the
TV off, power to this unit is automatically
set to standby. (v p. 207)

Off:

This unit does not link with power to a TV.

“Power Off Control” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

198

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Video Mode

Output Settings

Configure the video processing method to match the type of video
content.

Makes settings for video output.
0 Can be set when “HDMI”, “COMP” or “VIDEO” (v p. 207) is assigned for each
input source.
0 “Resolution”, “Progressive Mode” and “Aspect Ratio” can be set when “i/p Scaler”
is set to anything other than “Off”.
0 “Output Settings” cannot be set when 4K signals are input.
0 “Video Conversion”, “i/p Scaler”, “Resolution”, “Progressive Mode” and “Aspect
Ratio” settings are stored for each input source.

Auto
(Default):

Process video automatically based on
the HDMI content information.

Game:

Always process video for game content.
Minimize the video delay when the video
is delayed compared to the button
operations on the controller of the game
console.

Movie:

Perform image processing that is suitable
for contents other than games.

If “Video Mode” is set to “Auto”, the mode is switched according to the input
contents.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

199

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Video Conversion

Appendix

o i/p Scaler

The input video signal is converted automatically in conjunction with
the connected TV. (“Video conversion function” (v p. 303))
On
(Default):

The input video signal is converted.

Off:

The input video signal is not converted.

Front panel

Tips

Display

Rear panel

Set the video input signal to be subjected to i/p scaler processing.
i/p Scaler will convert the resolution of the input video signal to the
value set in “Resolution”. (v p. 201)

n When the input source is set other than to “iPod/
USB” and “Online Music”

200

Analog
(Default):

Use i/p (interlace-to-progressive) scaler
function for analog video signals.

Analog & HDMI:

Use i/p scaler function for analog and
HDMI video signal.

HDMI:

Use i/p scaler function for HDMI video
signals.

Off:

Do not use i/p scaler function.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Use i/p scaler function.

Off:

Do not use i/p scaler function.

Set the output resolution. You can set “Resolution” separately for
HDMI output of the analog video input and HDMI input.
Auto
(Default):

Display

Rear panel

The resolution supported by the TV
connected to the HDMI MONITOR OUT
connector is detected automatically and
the appropriate output resolution is set.

480p/576p / 1080i /
720p / 1080p:24Hz / 4K / Set the output resolution.
4K(60/50) :

0 “Analog & HDMI” can be set for input sources for which an HDMI input
connector is assigned.
0 Which items can be set depend on the input source assigned to each input
connector.
0 This function is not effective when the input signal is “x.v.Color”, 3D, sYCC601
color, Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color or computer resolutions.

Front panel

Appendix

o Resolution

n When the input source is set to “iPod/USB” and
“Online Music”
On
(Default):

Tips

0 When “i/p Scaler” is set to “Analog & HDMI”, the resolution of both the analog
video input signal and HDMI input signal can be set. (v p. 200)
0 When set to “1080p:24Hz”, you can enjoy film-like pictures for film sources (in
24 Hz). For video sources and mixed sources, we recommend setting the
resolution to “1080p”.
0 It is not possible to convert a 50 Hz signal into 1080p/24Hz. It is output at a
resolution of 1080p/50Hz.

201

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Progressive Mode

Tips

Appendix

o Aspect Ratio

Set an appropriate progressive conversion mode for the source video
signal.
Auto
(Default):

The video signal is automatically
detected and the appropriate mode is
set.

Video:

Select mode suitable for video playback.

Video and Film:

Select mode suitable for video and 30frame film material playback.

Set the aspect ratio for the video signals output to the HDMI.
16:9
(Default):

Output at 16:9 aspect ratio.

4:3 :

Output at 4:3 aspect ratio with black bars
on the sides of a 16:9 TV screen. (except
for 480p/576p output)

This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “Off”.
(v p. 200)
This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “Off”.
(v p. 200)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

202

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Component Video Out
Set the zone to which the component video output connector is assigned.
MAIN ZONE
(Default):

Assigns the component video output connector
to MAIN ZONE.

ZONE2:

Assigns the component video output connector
to ZONE2.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

203

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Now Playing

On Screen Display
Select the on-screen display user interface preferences.

Sets the display time for the playback display when the input source is
“Online Music”, “iPod/USB”, “Bluetooth” or “HD Radio”.

o Volume

Always On
(Default):

Show display continuously.

Auto Off:

Show display for 30 seconds after
operation.

Sets where to display the volume level.
Bottom
(Default):
Top:
Off:

Display at the bottom.
Display at the top.
Turn display off.

When the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed text (closed
captioning) or movie subtitles are present, set to “Top”.

o Info
Displays status of operation temporarily when the sound mode is
changed, or input source is switched.
On
(Default):
Off:

Front panel

Shows the volume display.
Does not show the volume display.

Display

Rear panel

204

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

TV Format
Set the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.

o Format
NTSC
(Default):

Select NTSC output.

PAL:

Select PAL output.

“Format” can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu screen
is not displayed. Following the display content to make the setting.
1. Press and hold the main unit’s STATUS and ZONE SELECT at the same time
for at least 3 seconds.
“Video Format ” appears on the display.
2. Use the main unit’s o or p and set the video signal format.
3. Press the main unit’s ENTER to complete the setting.

NOTE
When a format other than the video format of the connected TV is set, the picture
will not be displayed properly.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

205

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Inputs
Perform settings related to input source playback.
You do not have to change the settings to use the unit. Make settings when needed.

Input Assign

By default, each item is set as follows.

By making connections as indicated by the input sources printed on the
audio/video input connectors of this unit, you can just press one of the
input source select buttons to easily play back audio or video from a
connected device.
Please change the assignment of the HDMI input connector, digital audio
input connector, analog audio input connector, component video input
connector and video input connector when connecting an input source
that differs from that printed to the audio/video input connectors of this
unit.

Input source

Inputs/Input Assign
Set Defaults
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
Game
Media Player
TV Audio
AUX1
AUX2
CD

HDMI

DIGITAL

ANALOG

COMP

VIDEO

1
2
3
4
5
Front
6
-

COAX1
COAX2
OPT1
OPT2

1
2
3
4
Front
5

1
2
3
-

1
2
3
Front
-

Rear panel

ANALOG

COMP

CBL/SAT

COAX1

VIDEO
1

DVD

COAX2

Blu-ray

–

Game

–

Media Player

–

TV Audio

–

OPT1

–

AUX1

Front

–

Front

–

Front

AUX2

–

OPT2

–

When using the digital audio output on a TV/satellite box:
To play the video signal assigned to “HDMI” combined with the audio
signal assigned at “Input Assign” - “DIGITAL”, you will also need to
select “Digital” in the “Input Mode”. (v p. 209)

Display

DIGITAL

n TV set top box/satellite users please note

Changes HDMI input assignments

Front panel

Input connector
HDMI

206

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o HDMI

Tips

Appendix

o ANALOG

Set this to change the HDMI input connectors assigned to the input
sources.

Set this to change the analog audio input connectors assigned to the
input sources.

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / Assign an HDMI input connector to the selected
7 / Front:
input source.

1/2/3/4/5/
Front:

–:

Do not assign an HDMI input connector to the
selected input source.

Assign a analog audio input connector to the
selected input source.
Do not assign a analog audio input connector to
the selected input source.

–:

o COMP (Component video)
Set this to change the component video input connectors assigned to
the input sources.

When “HDMI Control” is set to “On” in the menu, “HDMI” cannot be assigned to
“TV Audio”. (v p. 197)

1 / 2 / 3:

o DIGITAL
Set this to change the digital audio input connectors assigned to the
input sources.
COAX1 (Coaxial) /
COAX2 /
OPT1 (Optical) /
OPT2:

Assign a digital audio input connector to the
selected input source.

–:

Do not assign a digital audio input connector
to the selected input source.

–:

Assign the component video input connector to the selected
input source.
Do not assign a component video input connector to the
selected input source.

o VIDEO
Set this to change the composite video input connectors assigned to
the input sources.
1 / 2 / 3 / Front:
–:

Assign the video input connector to the selected
input source.
Do not assign a video input connector to the
selected input source.

o Set Defaults
The “Input Assign” settings are returned to the default settings.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

207

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Source Rename

Appendix

Source Level

Change the display name for input source.
This is convenient when the name of your device and the input source
name of this unit are different. You can change the name to suit your
needs. When the renaming is completed, the name is displayed on this
unit’s display and on the menu screen.

This function corrects the playback level of the selected input source’s
audio input.
Make this setting if there are differences in the input volume levels
between the different sources.

o Source Level

CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Game /
Change the display name for input
AUX1 / AUX2 / Media Player / CD /
source.
TV Audio / Phono:

n When the input source is set to “iPod/USB”,
“Online Music” or “HD Radio”

The Source Rename settings are
returned to the default settings.

Set Defaults:

Tips

-12 dB – +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)

o Analog Inputs / Digital Inputs
Up to 12 characters can be input. For character input, see “Using the keyboard
screen” (v p. 180).

n When the input source is set other than to “iPod/
USB”, “Online Music” or “HD Radio”

Hide Sources

-12dB – +12dB (Default : 0dB)

Remove from the display input sources that are not used.
Show
(Default):

Use this source.

Hide:

Do not use this source.

Front panel

Display

0 The analog input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which
“ANALOG” is assigned at “Input Assign”. (v p. 206)
0 The digital input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which
“DIGITAL” is assigned at “Input Assign”. (v p. 206)
0 “Source Level” settings are stored for each input source.

Rear panel

208

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o Decode Mode

Input Select

Set the audio decode mode for input source.
It is normally recommended to set the audio input mode to “Auto”. But
we recommend changing it to “PCM” or “DTS” if the start of the source
is clipped or noise occurs.

Set the audio input mode and decode mode of each input source.
The input modes available for selection may vary depending on the input
source.
“Input Select” settings are stored for each input source.

o Input Mode
Set the audio input modes for the different input sources.
It is normally recommended to set the audio input mode to “Auto”.
Auto
(Default):

Automatically detect input signal and
perform playback.

HDMI:

Play only signals from HDMI input.

Digital:

Play only signals from digital audio input.

Analog:

Play only signals from analog audio input.

7.1CH IN:

Only signals input from the 7.1CH IN
connector will be played back.

Auto
(Default):

Detect type of digital audio input signal
and decode and play automatically.

PCM:

Decode and play only PCM input signals.

DTS:

Decode and play only DTS input signals.

This item can be set for input sources for which “HDMI” or “DIGITAL” is assigned
at “Input Assign” (v p. 206).

0 When digital signals are properly input, the ~ indicator lights on the display.
If the ~ indicator does not light, check “Input Assign” and the connections.
(v p. 206)
0 If “HDMI Control” is set to “On” and a TV compatible with the ARC is
connected via the HDMI MONITOR 1 connectors, the input mode whose input
source is “TV Audio” is fixed to ARC.
0 The sound mode cannot be set if the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.

Front panel

Appendix

Display

Rear panel

209

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Speakers
The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically. This is called
“Audyssey® Setup”.
You do not have to perform Audyssey® Setup when you have already performed “Speaker Calibration” in “Setup Assistant”.
To set up the speakers manually, use “Manual Setup” on the menu. (v p. 236)

Audyssey® Setup
To perform measurement, place the Sound calibration microphone in
multiple locations all around the listening area. For best results, we
recommend you measure in six or more positions, as shown in the
illustration (up to eight positions).
When measuring the second and subsequent positions, install the Sound
calibration microphone within 2 ft (60 cm) of the first measurement position
(main listening position).

FL SW C

(

If you perform the Audyssey® setup, the Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey
Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFC™ functions are
enabled. (v p. 187 - 189)

FL Front speaker (L)
FR Front speaker (R)
C Center speaker
SW Subwoofer
SL Surround speaker (L)
SR Surround speaker (R)

:Measuring positions)

Listening position

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

210

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o About the main listening position

0 Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt the room
measurements. Close windows and turn off the power on electronic devices
(radios, air conditioners, fluorescent lights, etc.). The measurements could be
affected by the sounds emitted by such devices.
0 During the measurement process, place cell phones outside the listening room.
Cell phone signals could disrupt the measurements.
0 Do not stand between the speakers and Sound calibration microphone or allow
obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. Also, install the
Sound calibration microphone at least 20 inches (50 cm) away from the wall.
Failure to do so will result in inaccurate readings.
0 During the measurement process, audible test tones will come from the speakers
and subwoofer(s), but this is part of normal operation. If there is background noise
in the room, these test signals will increase in volume.
0 Operating VOLUME d f on the remote control unit or VOLUME on the main unit
during the measurements will cancel the measurements.
0 Measurement cannot be performed when headphones are connected. Unplug the
headphones before performing Audyssey® Setup.

o About Audyssey Sub EQ HT™
Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ makes the integration of dual subwoofers
seamless by first compensating for any level and delay differences
between the two subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ®
XT32 to both subwoofers together.
To run Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ you must select “Measure (2 spkrs)” in
“Channel Select”. (v p. 213).

Display

Appendix

NOTE

The main listening position is the position where listeners would
normally sit or where one would normally sit alone within the listening
environment. Before starting Audyssey® Setup, place the Sound
calibration microphone in the main listening position.
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 uses the measurements from this position to
calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover
value for the subwoofer.

Front panel

Tips

Rear panel

211

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Procedure for speaker settings
(Audyssey® Setup)

Tips

Appendix

Attach the Sound calibration microphone to the
supplied microphone stand or own tripod and install it
at the main listening position.

When installing the Sound calibration microphone, point the tip of
the microphone toward the ceiling and adjust the height to match the
height of the ears of a listener in a seated position.

Preparation

Measurement

If using a subwoofer capable of the following
adjustments, set up the subwoofer as shown below.

n When using a subwoofer with a direct mode

Set the direct mode to “On” and disable the volume adjustment
and crossover frequency setting.

Calculation & Store

n When using a subwoofer without a direct mode
Make the following settings:
0 Volume : 12 o’clock position
0 Crossover frequency : Maximum/Highest Frequency
0 Low pass filter : Off
0 Standby mode : Off

Check

Finish

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

212

Remote

Index

Contents

Playback

Settings

Connect the Sound calibration microphone to the
SETUP MIC jack of this unit.

When the Sound calibration microphone is
connected, the following screen is displayed.

Tips

Select “Start”, then press ENTER.

Follow the instructions on the screen display and press
“Next” to proceed further.

Audyssey Setup
Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of
your room then optimize your speakers using the included
microphone and microphone stand.
Set the following items
if necessary.

Amp Assign
Channel Select
Check Results
Restore...
Start

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

213

Appendix

Audyssey® Setup can also make the following settings.
0 Amp Assign
The signals output from the SURROUND BACK, FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2 and HEIGHT1 speaker terminals can be switched in
accordance with your speaker environment. (Amp
Assign (v p. 221))
0 Channel Select
If channels that are not to be used are set in advance,
measurement for the set channels is skipped, and measuring
time can be reduced. You can also change the number of
surround back speakers and subwoofer.

Connections

Remote

Index

Contents

Playback

Settings

When the following screen is displayed, select “Begin
Test” and then press ENTER.

Start the measurement of the first position.

Tips

Appendix

When the detected speaker is displayed, select “Next”
and then press ENTER.
Audyssey Setup
Speaker Detection

Audyssey Setup
Select “Begin Test” to start the calibration.
NOTE: You will hear a series of loud chirps starting and stopping
during the tests.

Front
Center
Subwoofer
Surround
Surr. Back

Ear Height

:Yes
:Yes
:Yes
:Yes
:No

Repeat Last Test

Back

Begin Test

Connections

0 Measurement requires several minutes.

NOTE
If “Caution!” is displayed on TV screen:
0 Go to “Error messages” (v p. 218). Check any related items, and
perform the necessary procedures.
0 If the volume level for the subwoofer is not appropriate, an error message is
displayed. See “Subwoofer level error message and how to adjust”
(v p. 219).

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

214

Remote

Index

Contents

Playback

Settings

9
10

Move the Sound calibration microphone to position 2,
select “Continue”, then press ENTER.

The measurement of the second position starts.
Measurements can be made in up to eight positions.

Tips

Appendix

Repeat step 8, measuring positions 3 to 8.
Select “Continue”, then press ENTER.
Audyssey Setup
Measurements complete.
Select Continue to analyze the data...

Audyssey Setup
Place the microphone ear level at the 2nd listening position,
which should be no more than 2 ft (60cm) away from the 1st
position, then select “Continue”...

Ear Height

Repeat Last Test

Continue

Back

Complete

Continue

Start the analysis and storage of the measurement results.
0 Analysis takes several minutes to complete.
The more speakers and measurement positions that there are,
the more time it takes to perform the analysis.

Connections

To skip measuring the second and subsequent listening position, press o to
select “Complete” and press ENTER to proceed to step 11.

NOTE

n Stopping Audyssey® Setup

When the measurement results are being saved, make sure the power is not
turned off.

A Press BACK to display the popup screen.
B Press o to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

215

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Perform the settings for Audyssey Dynamic EQ® and
Audyssey Dynamic Volume®.

The following screen is displayed during the analysis. Configure the
settings as preferred.

Tips

Appendix

When the analysis and storage ends, unplug the Sound
calibration microphone from the SETUP MIC jack on the
main unit and then press “Next”.
Audyssey Setup
Now Analyzing and correcting the your room data.
Please disconnect the microphone from your AV receiver.

Audyssey Setup
Audyssey Dynamic EQ maintains bass, clarity and surround
sound at low volumes letting you enjoy late-night movies
and television.
Turn on the Dynamic EQ?
Yes
No

Applying room corrections
100%

Analyzing room data

Back

50%

0 Dynamic EQ corrects the frequency response in consideration of

the audio characteristics of the room and human hearing ability so
that sound can be heard even at low volume.
This is recommended when using the unit with the volume turned
down, e.g. when enjoying a movie or TV program in the middle of
the night.
0 Dynamic Volume adjusts the output volume to the optimal level
while constantly monitoring the level of the audio input to the unit.
Optimal volume control is performed automatically without any
loss in the dynamism and clarity of the sound when, for example,
the volume suddenly increases for commercials shown during
television programs.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

216

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Select “Details” and press ENTER to verify the
measurement results.

0 Subwoofers may measure a greater reported distance than the

actual distance due to added electrical delay common in
subwoofers.

NOTE
Do not change the speaker connection or subwoofer volume after Audyssey® Setup.
If these are changed, run Audyssey® Setup again in order to configure the optimum
equalizer settings.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

217

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Error messages
An error message is displayed if Audyssey® Setup could not be completed due to speaker placement, the measurement environment, etc. If an error
message is displayed, check the relevant items and perform the necessary measures. Be sure to turn off the power before checking speaker connections.
Examples

Error details

No speakers found.

Measures

0 Sound calibration microphone is not

0 Connect the included Sound calibration microphone to the

0 Not all speakers could be detected.

0 Check the speaker connections.

detected.

Ambient noise is too high or level is too 0 There is too much noise in the room.
low
0 Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low.

SETUP MIC jack of this unit.

0 Either turn off any device generating noise or move it away.
0 Perform again when the surroundings are quieter.
0 Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the

speakers are facing.

0 Adjust the subwoofer’s volume.

Front R : None

0 The displayed speaker could not be

Front R : Phase

0 The displayed speaker is connected with the

detected.

polarity reversed.

0 Check the connections of the displayed speaker.
0 Check the polarity of the displayed speaker.
0 For some speakers, this error message may be displayed

even if the speaker is properly connected. If you are sure the
connection is correct, press p to select “Ignore”, then press
ENTER.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

218

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Subwoofer level error message and how to
adjust

1
2

The optimal level of each subwoofer channel for Audyssey® Setup
measurement is 75 dB.
During subwoofer level measurement, an error message is displayed
when one level of subwoofers is outside the 72 – 78 dB range.
When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (active type), adjust the
subwoofer volume so that the subwoofer level is within the 72 to 78 dB
range.

Tips

Select “SW Level Matching” and then press ENTER.
Adjust the volume control on your subwoofer so that
the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB range.
When the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB
range, select “Next” and then press ENTER.

0 If you use two subwoofers, the second subwoofer’s adjustment

will be started. Repeat the operation from step 2, 3.

G Error message H
Audyssey Setup
Your Subwoofer 1’s level is too high.
If your subwoofer has a volume control on it,
select “SW Level Matching” to interactively adjust the level of
your subwoofer.
If your subwoofer does not have a volume control,
or if you do not want to use a subwoofer, select “Skip”.

Skip

SW Level Matching

Back

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

219

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings
If you set “Restore...” to “Restore”, you can return to Audyssey® Setup
measurement result (value calculated at the start by MultEQ® XT32) even
when you have changed each setting manually.
Audyssey Setup
Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of
your room then optimize your speakers using the included
microphone and microphone stand.
Set the following items
if necessary.

Amp Assign
Channel Select
Check Results
Restore...

Start

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

220

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Manual Setup

Tips

Appendix

Amp Assign
Select the power amplifier usage method to match your speaker system.

Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings
made in Audyssey® Setup.
0 If you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey® Setup,
you will no longer be able to select Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey
Dynamic EQ® or Audyssey Dynamic Volume®. (v p. 187 - 188)
0 This unit can be used without changing “Manual Setup” settings. Please
set if necessary.

o Assign Mode
Select how to use the power amp.
You need to configure the detailed settings for the speaker
configuration in accordance with the selected mode. Select Assign
Mode configure the corresponding detailed settings.
0 Setting to use the 9-channel power amplifier in this unit

and an external power amplifier connected to PRE OUT to
play back up to 11.1 channels.
0 You can connect speakers for up to 13.1 channels for
11.1ch:
MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched for
playing back up to 11.1-channels in accordance with the
input signal and sound mode. (v p. 224)
0 Settings to assign all power amplifier within this unit to

MAIN ZONE to play back up to 9.1 channels.

9.1ch:

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

221

0 You can connect speakers for up to 11.1 channels for

MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched for
playing back up to 9.1-channels in accordance with the input
signal and sound mode. (v p. 227)

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for

7.1ch +
ZONE2
(Default):

5.1ch +
ZONE2/3:

Front panel

7.1ch +
ZONE2/3MONO:

MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched
for playing back up to 7.1-channels in accordance with
the input signal and sound mode. (v p. 231)
front speaker bi-amp connection to 2-channels.

7.1ch (BiAmp):

0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers within this unit

5.1ch (BiAmp) +
ZONE2:

for ZONE2 and ZONE3 each to two different
channel.

Rear panel

ZONE2 and ZONE3 each to a different channel.

0 You can connect speakers for up to 9.1 channels for

0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for

ZONE3 to 2-channels
0 You can connect speakers for up to 9.1 channels for
MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched
for playing back up to 7.1-channels in accordance with
the input signal and sound mode. (v p. 230)

Display

Appendix

0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for

ZONE2 to 2-channels.
0 You can connect speakers for up to 9.1 channels for
MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched
for playing back up to 7.1-channels in accordance with
the input signal and sound mode. (v p. 229)
0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for

7.1ch +
ZONE3:

Tips

222

Remote

0 You can connect speakers for up to 9.1 channels for

MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched
for playing back up to 7.1-channels in accordance with
the input signal and sound mode. (v p. 232)
0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for

front speaker bi-amp connection to 2-channels.

0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for

ZONE2 to 2-channels.

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for

9.1ch/
2ch
Front:

7.1ch +
Front B:

Dolby
Atmos :

bi-amp connection of the 2-channel playback speakers
to 4 channels.
0 You can switch the front speakers when using 2-channel
playback in direct mode or stereo mode, or when using
multi-channel surround playback.
When setting speakers for 2-channel playback, also
perform the “2ch Playback” setting. (v p. 244)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers within this unit

connecting 2-channel playback speakers to 2 channels.
0 You can switch the front speakers when using 2-channel
playback in direct mode or stereo mode, or when using
multi-channel surround playback. (v p. 233)
When setting speakers for 2-channel playback, also
perform the “2ch Playback” setting. (v p. 244)
0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for the

7.1ch/
2ch
Front
(BiAmp):

Tips

223

for connecting the second set of front speakers.

0 You can switch between the desired combination of

front speakers A and front speakers B. (v p. 234)
Switch the front speaker using the “Front Speaker”
setting. (v p. 244)
0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers within this unit

Remote

for the speaker layout suitable for Dolby Atmos
playback. (v p. 235)

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Detailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“11.1ch”

Tips

Appendix

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “4 Height Speakers”H
Select the height channels used for the two pair.

When “Assign Mode” is set to “11.1ch”, set the following items.

Select items

n Height Speakers

AUDIO OUT connectors

HEIGHT1

HEIGHT2
Top Middle

Select the number of the height speakers used in MAIN ZONE.

Front Height & Top Middle

Front Height

Front Height & Top Rear

Front Height

Top Rear

2 Height Speakers
(Default):

Uses a set of (two) height speakers.

Front Height & Rear Height

Front Height

Rear Height

4 Height Speakers :

Uses two sets of (four) height speakers.

Top Front & Top Rear
(Default)

Top Front

Top Rear

Using Dolby Speakers :

Uses a Dolby enabled speaker placed on
the floor.

Top Front

Rear Height

Top Middle & Rear Height

Top Middle

Rear Height

Top Front & Rear Height

n Height Layout
Select the type of the height speakers used.
GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “2 Height Speakers”H
Select the height channel used.
Select items

AUDIO OUT connectors

Front Height
(Default)

Front Height

Top Front

Top Middle

Top Rear

Rear Height

Front panel

HEIGHT1

Rear Height

Display

Rear panel

224

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

HEIGHT1

HEIGHT2

Front Dolby

Not assigned.

Surround Dolby

Not assigned.

Back Dolby

Not assigned.

Front Dolby & Top Rear

Front Dolby

Top Rear

Front Dolby & Rear Height

Front Dolby

Rear Height

Front Height & Surr. Dolby

Front Height

Surround Dolby

Front Height & Back Dolby

Front Height

Back Dolby

Top Front & Surround Dolby

Top Front

Surround Dolby

Top Front & Back Dolby

Top Front

Back Dolby

Front Dolby & Surround Dolby

Front Dolby

Surround Dolby

Front Dolby & Back Dolby

Front Dolby

Back Dolby

Front Dolby
(Default)
Surround Dolby

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

n Wide/Height2

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “Using Dolby Speakers”H
Select the height channels used for the two pair.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items

Tips

Select the channel that is output from the FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
speaker terminals.
Front Wide Outputs the front wide channel from the FRONT WIDE/
(Default):
HEIGHT2 speaker terminals.
Top Rearz:

Outputs the channel assigned for HEIGHT2 from the
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2 speaker terminals.
For the front wide channel, use the PRE OUT
connectors.

z The displayed selection shows the channel name assigned for HEIGHT2 in the
“Height Layout” setting.

In some settings, “Wide/Height2” may not be available.

225

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

n Pre-out

Top Rearz:

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “2 Height Speakers”H
The front left and right pre-amp outputs are connected
to an external amplifier.

Front
Heightz:

The HEIGHT1 left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.

Appendix

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “4 Height Speakers” and “Wide/
Height2” is set to “Front Wide”H

Selects the PRE OUT connectors that connect the external power
amplifier used in MAIN ZONE.

Front:

Tips

The HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.

Top Front & Top The HEIGHT1/HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp
outputs are connected to an external amplifier.
Rearz:
Front & Top
Rearz:

The front/HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp outputs
are connected to an external amplifier.

z The speaker name selected using “Height Layout” is displayed.

z The displayed selection shows the speaker name assigned for the HEIGHT1
speaker terminal in the “Height Layout” setting.

When one set of pre-amp outputs are used, a maximum 11.1-channel audio can
be output when Dolby Atmos or Dolby Surround are played back. Furthermore,
when two sets of pre-amp outputs are used, a maximum 11.1-channel audio can
be output when Audyssey DSX® or Neo:X are played back in addition to when
Dolby Atmos or Dolby Surround are played back.

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “4 Height Speakers” and “Wide/
Height2” is set other than to “Front Wide”H
Front Wide:

The front wide left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.

Front & Front The front/front wide left and right pre-amp outputs are
Wide:
connected to an external amplifier.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

226

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Front:
Front Dolbyz:

The HEIGHT1 left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.

Surround
Dolbyz:

The HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.

Front Dolby &
Surr. Dolbyz:

The HEIGHT1/HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp
outputs are connected to an external amplifier.

Front & Surr.
Dolbyz:

The front/HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp outputs
are connected to an external amplifier.

Front Wide:

The front wide left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.

Front & Front
Wide:

The front/front wide left and right pre-amp outputs
are connected to an external amplifier.

When “Assign Mode” is set to “9.1ch”, set the following items.

n Height Speakers
Select the number of the height speakers used in MAIN ZONE.
None:

Uses no height speakers.

2 Height Speakers
(Default):

Uses a set of (two) height speakers.

4 Height Speakers:

Uses two sets of (four) height speakers.

Using Dolby Speakers:

Uses a Dolby enabled speaker placed on
the floor.

z The speaker name selected using “Height Layout” is displayed.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

o Detailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“9.1ch”

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “Using Dolby Speakers”H
Available settings differ depending on the “Height Layout” and “Wide/
Height2” settings.
The front left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.

Tips

227

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

n Height Layout

AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items
Front Dolby
(Default)

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “2 Height Speakers”H
Select the height channel used.
AUDIO OUT connectors

Surround Dolby

HEIGHT1

Front Height
(Default)

Front Height

Top Front

Top Middle

Top Rear

AUDIO OUT connectors

HEIGHT1

HEIGHT2
Top Middle

Front Height & Top Middle

Front Height

Front Height & Top Rear

Front Height

Top Rear

Front Height & Rear Height

Front Height

Rear Height

Top Front & Top Rear
(Default)

Top Front

Top Rear

Top Front & Rear Height

Top Front

Rear Height

Top Middle

Rear Height

Top Middle & Rear Height

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

228

Front Dolby

Not assigned.
Not assigned.

Back Dolby

Not assigned.

Front Dolby & Top Rear

Front Dolby

Top Rear

Front Dolby & Rear Height

Front Dolby

Rear Height

Front Height & Surr. Dolby

Front Height

Surround Dolby

Top Front

Surround Dolby

Front Dolby

Surround Dolby

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “4 Height Speakers”H
Select the height channels used for the two pairs of speakers.
Select items

HEIGHT2

Surround Dolby

Front Dolby & Surround Dolby

Rear Height

HEIGHT1

Back Dolby

Top Front & Surround Dolby

Top Rear

Rear Height

Appendix

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “Using Dolby Speakers”H
Select the height channels used for the two pair.

Select the type of the height speakers used.
This can be selected when the “Height Speakers” setting is “2 Height
Speakers”, “4 Height Speakers” or “Using Dolby Speakers”.

Select items

Tips

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Select the height channel used.
This can be selected when the “Speakers for ZONE2” setting is
“FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2” or “SURROUND BACK”.

When “Assign Mode” is set to “7.1ch + ZONE2”, set the following
items.

AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items

n Speakers for ZONE2
Select speaker terminals that output audio in ZONE2.
The channels of speaker terminals selected for ZONE2 cannot be
output in MAIN ZONE.
Outputs audio in ZONE2 from FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2 speaker terminals.

HEIGHT1:

Outputs audio in ZONE2 from HEIGHT1
speaker terminals.

SURROUND BACK:

Outputs audio in ZONE2 from SURROUND
BACK speaker terminals.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

n Height Layout

o Detailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“7.1ch + ZONE2”

FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2
(Default):

Tips

None

HEIGHT1
No height channels are used.

Front Height
(Default)

Front Height

Top Front

Top Middle

Top Rear

Rear Height

Front Dolby

Surround Dolby

229

Remote

Surround Dolby

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Select the height channel used.
This can be selected when the “Speakers for ZONE3” setting is
“FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2” or “SURROUND BACK”.

When “Assign Mode” is set to “7.1ch + ZONE3”, set the following
items.

AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items

n Speakers for ZONE3
Select speaker terminals that output audio in ZONE3.
The channels of speaker terminals selected for ZONE3 cannot be
output in MAIN ZONE.
Outputs audio in ZONE3 from FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2 speaker terminals.

HEIGHT1:

Outputs audio in ZONE3 from HEIGHT1
speaker terminals.

SURROUND BACK:

Outputs audio in ZONE3 from SURROUND
BACK speaker terminals.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

n Height Layout

o Detailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“7.1ch + ZONE3”

FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2
(Default):

Tips

None

HEIGHT1
No height channels are used.

Front Height
(Default)

Front Height

Top Front

Top Middle

Top Rear

Rear Height

Front Dolby

Surround Dolby

230

Remote

Surround Dolby

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Select the height channel used.
This can be selected when the “Speakers for ZONE2/3” setting is
“FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2” or “SURROUND BACK”.

When “Assign Mode” is set to “7.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO”, set the
following items.

AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items

n Speakers for ZONE2/3
Select speaker terminals that output audio in ZONE2 and ZONE3.
The channels of speaker terminals selected for ZONE2/ZONE3 cannot
be output in MAIN ZONE.
Outputs audio in ZONE2 from the L channel of
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2 speaker terminals and
audio in ZONE3 from the R channel.

HEIGHT1:

Outputs audio in ZONE2 from the L channel of
HEIGHT1 speaker terminals and audio in ZONE3
from the R channel.

SURROUND
BACK:

Outputs audio in ZONE2 from the L channel of
SURROUND BACK speaker terminals and audio in
ZONE3 from the R channel.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

n Height Layout

o Detailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“7.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO”

FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2
(Default):

Tips

None

HEIGHT1
No height channels are used.

Front Height
(Default)

Front Height

Top Front

Top Middle

Top Rear

Rear Height

Front Dolby

Surround Dolby

231

Remote

Surround Dolby

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Select the height channel used.
This can be selected when the “Speakers for Bi-Amp” setting is
“FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2” or “SURROUND BACK”.

When “Assign Mode” is set to “7.1ch (Bi-Amp)”, set the following items.

n Speakers for Bi-Amp

AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items

Select the speaker terminals used for the bi-amp connection of front
speakers.
The channels of speaker terminals selected for the bi-amp cannot be
output in MAIN ZONE.
Make the bi-amp connection by using the FRONT
speaker terminals and FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
speaker terminals.

HEIGHT1:

Make the bi-amp connection by using the FRONT
speaker terminals and HEIGHT1 speaker
terminals.

SURROUND
BACK:

Make the bi-amp connection by using the FRONT
speaker terminals and SURROUND BACK
speaker terminals.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

n Height Layout

o Detailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“7.1ch (Bi-Amp)”

FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2
(Default):

Tips

None

HEIGHT1
No height channels are used.

Front Height
(Default)

Front Height

Top Front

Top Middle

Top Rear

Rear Height

Front Dolby

Surround Dolby

232

Remote

Surround Dolby

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Select the height channel used.
This can be selected when the “Speakers for 2ch” setting is “FRONT
WIDE/HEIGHT2” or “SURROUND BACK”.

When “Assign Mode” is set to “9.1ch/2ch Front”, set the following
items.

AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items

n Speakers for 2ch
Select the speaker terminals that connect the front speakers
exclusively used for 2-channel playback.
Connect the front speakers exclusively used for 2channel playback to the “FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2” speaker terminals.

HEIGHT1:

Connect the front speakers exclusively used for 2channel playback to the HEIGHT1 speaker
terminals.

SURROUND
BACK:

Connect the front speakers exclusively used for 2channel playback to the SURROUND BACK
speaker terminals.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

n Height Layout

o Detailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“9.1ch/2ch Front”

FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2
(Default):

Tips

None

HEIGHT1
No height channels are used.

Front Height
(Default)

Front Height

Top Front

Top Middle

Top Rear

Rear Height

Front Dolby

Surround Dolby

233

Remote

Surround Dolby

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Select the height channel used.
This can be selected when the “Speakers for Front B” setting is
“FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2” or “SURROUND BACK”.

When “Assign Mode” is set to “7.1ch + Front B”, set the following
items.

AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items

n Speakers for Front B
Select the speaker terminals used for the front speakers of the second
unit.
Connect the front speakers of the second unit to
the FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2 speaker terminals.

HEIGHT1:

Connect the front speakers of the second unit to
the HEIGHT1 speaker terminals.

SURROUND
BACK:

Front panel

None

Rear panel

HEIGHT1
No height channels are used.

Front Height
(Default)

Front Height

Top Front

Top Middle

Top Rear

Rear Height

Connect the front speakers of the second unit to
the SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.

Display

Appendix

n Height Layout

o Detailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“7.1ch + Front B”

FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2
(Default):

Tips

Rear Height

Front Dolby

Surround Dolby

234

Remote

Surround Dolby

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o View Terminal Config.

o Detailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“Dolby Atmos”

This shows how to connect the speaker terminals and PRE OUT
connectors for your “Amp Assign” setting on the menu screen.

When “Assign Mode” is set to “Dolby Atmos”, set the following items.

n Layout
Select the speaker layout for Dolby Atmos playback.

7.1ch + 4 Height:

This is a layout that adds the top front and
top rear speakers to the 7.1 channel layout
which includes the surround back channel.
Connect the top front speakers to the
HEIGHT1 speaker terminals and connect the
top rear speakers to the HEIGHT2 PRE OUT
connectors through an external power
amplifier.

7.1ch + 2 Height
(Default):

This is a layout that adds the top middle
speakers to the 7.1 channel layout including
the surround back channel. Connect the top
middle speakers to the HEIGHT1 speaker
terminals.

5.1ch + 4 Height:

This is a layout that adds the top front and
top rear speakers to the basic 5.1 channel
layout. Connect the top front speakers to the
HEIGHT1 speaker terminals and the top rear
speakers to the FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
speaker terminals.

5.1ch + 2 Height:

This is a layout that adds the top middle
speakers to the basic 5.1 channel layout.
Connect the top middle speakers to the
HEIGHT1 speaker terminals.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

235

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Appendix

o Subwoofer

Speaker Config.

Set the presence of a subwoofer.

Select whether or not speakers are present, playback capacity for low
bass frequencies and speaker size.

o Front

Set the front speaker size.
Large
(Default):

Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.

Small:

Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.

Small
(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.

None:

Select when a center speaker is not
connected.

Display

Rear panel

Use only one subwoofer.

None:

Select when a subwoofer is not
connected.

Set the presence and size of the surround speakers.

Set the presence and size of the center speaker.
Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.

Use two subwoofers.

o Surround

o Center
Large:

2 spkrs:
1 spkr
(Default):

When “Subwoofer” is set to “None” and you set “Front” to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is
automatically set to “1 spkr”.

0 When “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to “Large”.
0 When “Front” is set to “Small”, you cannot set speakers other than “Front” to
“Large”.

Front panel

Tips

Large:

Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.

Small
(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.

None:

Select when the surround speakers are
not connected.

When “Surround” is set to “None”, “Surr. Back”, “Front Wide”, “Surround Dolby”
and “Back Dolby” are automatically set to “None”.

236

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Surr. Back

Tips

Appendix

o Front Wide

Set the presence, size and number of surround back speakers.

Set the presence and size of the front wide speakers.

Large:

Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.

Large:

Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.

Small
(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.

Small
(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.

None:

Select when the surround back speakers
are not connected.

None:

Select when the front wide speakers are
not connected.

2 spkrs
(Default):

Use two surround back speakers.

1 spkr:

Use only one surround back speaker.
Connect to the L terminal to SURROUND
BACK when this setting is selected.

o Front Height
Set the presence and size of the front height speakers.

If “Surr. Back” is “None” or “1 spkr”, “Back Dolby” is automatically “None”.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

237

Large:

Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.

Small
(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.

None:

Select when the front height speakers are
not connected.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Top Front

Tips

Appendix

o Top Rear

Set the presence and size of the top front speakers.

Set the presence and size of the top rear speakers.

Large:

Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.

Large:

Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.

Small
(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.

Small
(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.

None:

Select when the top front speakers are
not connected.

None:

Select when the top rear speakers are
not connected.

o Top Middle

o Rear Height

Set the presence and size of the top middle speakers.

Set the presence and size of the rear height speakers.

Large:

Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.

Large:

Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.

Small
(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.

Small
(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.

None:

Select when the top middle speakers are
not connected.

None:

Select when the rear height speakers are
not connected.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

238

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Front Dolby

Tips

Appendix

o Back Dolby

Set the presence and size of the front Dolby speakers.

Set the presence and size of the back Dolby speakers.

Large:

Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.

Large:

Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.

Small
(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.

Small
(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.

None:

Select when the front Dolby speakers are
not connected.

None:

Select when the back Dolby speakers are
not connected.

o Surround Dolby

When speakers for which you assigned Height1 in “Amp Assign” are set to
“None”, “None” is automatically set for Height2.

Set the presence and size of the surround Dolby speakers.
Large:

Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.

Small
(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.

None:

Select when the surround Dolby
speakers are not connected.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

239

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o Set the distance

Distances

0.0 ft – 60.0 ft / 0.00 m – 18.00 m

Set distance from listening position to speakers.
Measure beforehand the distance from the listening position to each
speaker.

0 The speakers that can be selected differ depending on the “Amp Assign” and
“Speaker Config.” settings. (v p. 221, 236)
0 Default settings:
Front L / Front R / F. Height L / F. Height R / F. Wide L / F. Wide R / Center /
Subwoofer 1 / Subwoofer 2: 12.0 ft (3.60 m)
Speakers other than the above: 10.0 ft (3.00 m)
0 Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 20.0 ft
(6.00 m).

o Unit
Set the unit of distance.
Feet (Default)
Meters

o Step
Set the minimum variable width of the distance.
1 ft (Default) / 0.1 ft
0.1 m / 0.01 m

o Set Defaults
The “Distances” settings are returned to the default settings.

Front panel

Appendix

Display

Rear panel

240

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Levels
Set the volume of the test tone to be the same at the listening position
when it is output from each speaker.

o Test Tone Start
A test tone is output from the selected speaker.
While listening to the test tone, adjust the volume output from the
selected speaker.
–12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)

0 The set “Levels” are reflected in all sound modes.
0 If you wish to adjust the channel level for each input source, carry out the
settings in “Channel Level Adjust”. (v p. 137)
0 When headphones are connected to the PHONES connector on this unit, you
cannot set “Levels”.

o Set Defaults
The “Levels” settings are returned to the default settings.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

241

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Set the crossover frequency

Crossovers

40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz /
200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default : 80 Hz)

Set in accordance with the lower limit frequency of the base frequencies
that can be played back through each speaker. See the speaker manual
for information concerning speaker crossover frequency.

o Speaker Selection

0 “Crossovers” can be set when the “Subwoofer Mode” setting is “LFE+Main”, or
when you have a speaker that is set to “Small”. (v p. 243)
0 The default crossover frequency is “80 Hz”, which will work best with the
widest variety of speakers. We recommend setting to a higher frequency that
the crossover frequency when small speakers are used. For example, set to
“250 Hz” when the frequency range of the speakers is 250 Hz – 20 kHz.
0 Sound below the crossover frequency is cut off from the output of the
speakers set in “Small”. This cut off bass frequency is output from the
subwoofer or front speakers.
0 The speakers that can be set when “Individual” is selected differ depending on
to the “Subwoofer Mode” setting. (v p. 243)

Selects how to set the crossover frequency.
All
(Default):

Sets the same crossover frequency for all
speakers.

Individual:

Selects the crossover points for each
speaker individually.

0 When “LFE” is selected, speakers set to “Small” at “Speaker Config.” can be
set. If the speakers are set to (v p. 236)“Large”, “Full Band” is displayed
and the setting cannot be made.
0 When “LFE+Main” is selected, speakers can be set regardless of the
“Speaker Config.” setting. (v p. 236)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

242

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o LPF for LFE

Bass

Set LFE signal playback range. Set this when you want to change the
playback frequency (low pass filter point) of the subwoofer.

Set subwoofer and LFE signal range playback.

80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz
(Default : 120 Hz)

o Subwoofer Mode
Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.
LFE
(Default):

The low range signal of the channel set to
“Small” speaker size is added to the LFE
signal output from the subwoofer.

LFE+Main:

The low range signal of all channels is
added to the LFE signal output from the
subwoofer.

0 “Subwoofer Mode” can be set when “Speaker Config.” - “Subwoofer” in the
menu is set to other than “None”. (v p. 236)
0 Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass.
0 If “Speaker Config.” - “Front” and “Center” are set to “Large”, and “Subwoofer
Mode” is set to “LFE”, no sound may be output from the subwoofers,
depending on the input signal or selected sound mode. Select “LFE+Main” if
you want the bass signals to always be produced from the subwoofer.
(v p. 236)

Front panel

Appendix

Display

Rear panel

243

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Front Speaker

Appendix

2ch Playback

Set the front speaker A/B to use for every sound mode.
A
(Default):

Front speaker A is used.

Front speaker B is used.

A+B :

Both front speakers A and B are used.

Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct
and stereo playback modes.

o Setting
Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct
and stereo playback modes.

0 This can be set when “Assign Mode” is set to “7.1ch + Front B”. (v p. 221)
0 This can be set by pressing SPKR A/B on the main unit.

Front panel

Tips

Display

Rear panel

244

Auto
(Default):

The settings in “Speakers” are applied. (v p. 210)

Manual:

Set the speakers for 2-channel playback. Make the
following settings:

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Front

Tips

o SW Mode

Set the size of the front speakers for 2-channel playback.
Large
(Default):

Use a large speaker that can adequately play back
very low bass frequencies.

Small:

Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback
capacity for very low bass frequencies.

Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.

When “Speaker Config.”-“Subwoofer” in the menu is set to “None”, “Large” is
automatically set. (v p. 236)

o Subwoofer

LFE
(Default):

When “2ch Playback”-“Front” is set to “Large”, only
LFE signals are output from the subwoofer. Also,
when “2ch Playback” - “Front” is set to “Small”, the
front channel low range signals are added to the
LFE signals and output from the subwoofer.

LFE+Main:

The front channel low range signal is added to the
LFE signal output from the subwoofer.

This can be set when “2ch Playback”-“Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.

Set the presence of a subwoofer.
Yes
(Default):

Use a subwoofer.

No:

Select when a subwoofer is not connected.

When “Speaker Config.”-“Subwoofer” in the menu is set to “None”, No is
automatically set. (v p. 236) If the “Front” setting is “Small”, the setting is
automatically “Yes”.

Front panel

Appendix

Display

Rear panel

245

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Crossover

Tips

o Distance FL/Distance FR

Set the maximum frequency of the bass signal output from each
channel to the subwoofer.

Set distance from main listening position to speaker.
0.0ft – 60.0ft (Default : 12.0ft) /
0.00m – 18.00m (Default : 3.60m)

40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz /
200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default : 80 Hz)

Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 20.0 ft (6.00
m).

0 This can be set when “2ch Playback”-“Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.
0 When “2ch Playback”-“Front” is set to “Large” and “SW Mode” is set to LFE,
“Full Band” is displayed and this cannot be set.

o Level FL/Level FR
Adjust the level of each channel.
-12.0dB – +12.0dB (Default : 0.0dB)

Front panel

Appendix

Display

Rear panel

246

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Network
To use this unit by connecting it to a home network (LAN), you must configure network settings.
If you set up your home network (LAN) via DHCP, set “DHCP” to “On”. (Use the default setting.) This allows this unit to use your home network (LAN).
When assigning an IP address to each device manually, you need to assign an IP address to this unit using the “IP Address” settings, and enter
information about your home network (LAN) such as the gateway address and subnet mask, etc.

Connection

Information
Display network information.
Friendly Name / Connection / SSID / DHCP / IP Address /
MAC Address

Choose whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a
wired LAN.
When connecting to the network using wired LAN, select “Wired
(Ethernet)” after connecting a LAN cable,
When connecting to the network using wireless LAN, select “Wireless (WiFi)” and configure the “Wi-Fi Setup”.

MAC Address is required to create a vTuner account.

o Connect Using
Select the method for connecting to the home network (LAN).
Wired (Ethernet): Use a LAN cable to connect to a network.
Wireless (Wi-Fi):

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

247

Remote

Use the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) function to connect
to a network.

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Appendix

n When connecting using Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi Setup

1. Select “Wireless connection” on the TV screen.
2. Check that your iOS device is connected to the wireless LAN
(Wi-Fi) router and select “Marantz SR7009” from “SET UP NEW
AIRPLAY SPEAKER...” at the bottom of the Wi-Fi configuration
screen of your iOS device.
3. Tap “Next” on the screen of the iOS device.

Connect to a wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) router.
The router can be connected in the following ways. Select the connection
method to suit your home environment.

o Scan Networks
Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of possible
networks shown on the TV screen.

The iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS7 or later.

1. Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of wireless
networks.
Select “Rescan” if the network cannot be found.
2. Enter your password and select “OK”.

n When using a USB cable
1. Select “USB cable” on the TV screen.
2. Check that your iOS device is connected to the wireless LAN
(Wi-Fi) and connect it to the USB port on the front panel using a
USB cable.
3. Select “Connect” on the TV screen.
4. Tap “Allow” when the connection message appears on the
screen of your iOS device.

o Use iOS Device
Use your iOS device (iPhone/iPod/iPad) to connect to the network. By
connecting your iOS device to this unit, the unit can be automatically
connected to the same network as your device.
This unit can be connected to your iOS device in two ways, using a
USB cable and using Wi-Fi.

Front panel

Tips

Display

Rear panel

The iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS5 or later.

248

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o WPS Router

Tips

Appendix

o Manual

Use a WPS-compatible router to connect.
There are two ways to connect, using the push button method or the
PIN code method. Select the connection method to match your router.

Enter the name (SSID) and password of the network you wish to
connect to.
1. Set the following items.

n When connecting using the push button method
1. Select “Push Button” on the TV screen.
2. Switch to the WPS mode by pressing the WPS button of the
router you wish to connect to.
0 The time for pressing the button varies depending on the
router.
3. Select “Connect” on the TV screen within 2 minutes.

SSID:

Input the name of the wireless network (SSID).

Security:

Select the encryption method according to the
encryption setting of the access point you are using.

Password:

Input the password.

Select the Default Key.
Default Key: When connecting to a “WEP” encrypted network,
“Default Key” menu is displayed.

n When connecting using the PIN code method

2. Select “Connect” at the end of the setting.

1. Select “PIN” on the TV screen.
2. Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of
wireless networks.
This displays the PIN code of the unit on the TV screen.
3. Register the PIN code of the unit in the router.

The wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) settings of this unit can also be configured from a PC or
tablet that supports wireless LAN connection.
When using a device that has a firmware version of iOS7 or later, “When connecting
using Wi-Fi” (v p. 248) in “Use iOS Device”.
1. Press and hold the DIMMER and ZONE SELECT buttons on the main unit for at
least 3 seconds when the power of the unit is on.
2. Connect the wireless LAN of the PC or tablet used to “Marantz SR7009” when the
message “Connect your Wi-Fi device to Wi-Fi network called “Marantz SR7009””
appears in the display.
3. Start up the browser and enter “192.168.1.16” in the URL.
4. Use the browser to enter the settings, select “Connect” and then exit the settings.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

249

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o IP Address

Settings

Set the IP address within the ranges shown below.

Configure the proxy settings and IP address.
0 If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), the information
required for network connection such as the IP address will be
automatically configured since the DHCP function is set to “On” in the
default settings of this unit.
0 Set up the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway and DNS server
information only when assigning a fixed IP address or when connecting
to a network without DHCP function.
0 Configure the proxy settings when using a proxy server to connect to
the Internet.

0 The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses

are set.
CLASS A:10.0.0.1 - 10.255.255.254
CLASS B:172.16.0.1 - 172.31.255.254
CLASS C:192.168.0.1 - 192.168.255.254

o Subnet Mask
When connecting an xDSL modem or connector adapter directly to
this unit, input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation
supplied by your provider. Normally input 255.255.255.0.

o Default Gateway

Network/Settings

When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP address.

DHCP
Off
-IP Address
192.168.001.002
255.255.255.000
-Subnet Mask
-Default Gateway
192.168.001.001
-Primary DNS
192.168.001.001
-Secondary DNS
000.000.000.000
Proxy
On(Address)
-Address
000.000.000.000
-Port
00000
Save
Cancel
Configures the network settings manually

o Primary DNS, Secondary DNS

If there is only one DNS address indicated in the documentation
supplied by your provider, input it at “Primary DNS”. If two or more
DNS are provided by your provider, enter both “Primary DNS” and
“Secondary DNS”.

o DHCP
Selects how to connect to the network.
On
(Default):

Configure the network settings
automatically from your router.

Off:

Configure the network settings manually.

Front panel

Appendix

Display

Rear panel

250

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Proxy

Select when inputting by address.

On(Name):

Select when inputting by domain name.

Off
(Default):

Disables the proxy server.

Appendix

IP Control

Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a proxy server.
Make the proxy settings only when you connect to the Internet via a
proxy server that is on your internal network or provided by your
provider, etc.
On(Address):

Tips

Enables network communication in standby power mode.
Off In Standby:

Suspend network function during standby.

Always On
(Default):

Network is on during standby. Main unit
operable with a network compatible
controller.

When using the web control function or Marantz Remote App, use with the “IP
Control” setting set to “Always On”.

o Port
Enter port number.

NOTE
When “IP Control” is set to “Always On”, it consumes more standby power.

0 If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and settings.
(v p. 73)
0 If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP (Internet
Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased your computer.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

251

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Friendly Name

Tips

Appendix

Diagnostics

The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You
can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences.

Used to check the network connection.

o Physical Connection

o Friendly Name

Checks the physical LAN port connection.

Selects Friendly Name from the list.
When you select “Other”, you can change the Friendly Name
according to your preferences.

OK
Error: The LAN cable is not connected. Check the connection.

Home Theater / Living Room / Family Room / Guest Room /
Kitchen / Dining Room / Master Bedroom / Bedroom / Den /
Office / Other

When connected using a wireless LAN, “Connection
displayed.

Wireless (Wi-Fi)” will be

o Router Access
Checks the connection from this unit to the router.

0 Up to 63 characters can be input.
For character input, see “Using the keyboard screen” (v p. 180).
0 The default Friendly Name on first use is “Marantz SR7009”.

o Set Defaults

Error:

Restores Friendly Name, which you had changed, to the default
setting.

Failed to communicate with the router. Check the router
settings.

o Internet Access
Checks whether this unit has access to the Internet (WAN).
OK
Error:

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

252

Failed to connect to the Internet. Check the Internet connection
environment or router settings.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Maintenance Mode
Use when receiving maintenance from a Marantz service engineer or
custom installer. Ordinarily, this mode isn’t suitable for use by the end
user, only by a trained service technician or custom installation
professional.
NOTE
Only use this function if so instructed by a Marantz serviceperson or installer.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

253

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

General
Make various other settings.

Language

ECO

Set the language for display the menu on the TV screen.

Configure the settings of the ECO Mode and auto standby mode.

English / Français / Español (Default : English)

o ECO Mode
This mode can reduce the power consumption when the power of the
unit is on.

“Language” can also be set up by the following operation. However, the menu screen
is not displayed. Watch the display while configuring the settings.
1. Press and hold the main unit’s STATUS and ZONE SELECT at the

same time for at least 3 seconds.
“Video Format ” appears on the display.
2. Press the main unit’s i.
“GUI Language ENGLISH” appears on the display.
3. Use the main unit’s o or p and set the language.
4. Press the main unit’s ENTER to complete the setting.

On:

Reduce the power consumption.

Auto:

The power consumption is automatically
reduced to match the volume.

Off
(Default):

Do not reduce the power consumption.

0 When you want to output audio at a high volume level, it is recommended to
set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
0 Eco mode can also be switched by pressing ECO G on the remote control
unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

254

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Power On Default

Tips

Appendix

o Auto Standby

Set the mode to ECO when the power is on.

Set so the unit power automatically switches to standby.

Last
(Default):

The ECO Mode will be set to the previous
setting before the power was switched off.

n MAIN ZONE

On:

When power is turned on, the mode will
always be switched to the ECO Mode in
“On”.

Auto:

When power is turned on, the mode will
always be switched to the ECO Mode in
“Auto”.

Off:

Sets the time for switching to auto standby when there are no audio or
video signals input into this unit.
Before the unit enters standby mode, “Auto Standby” is displayed on
the unit display and the menu screen.

When power is turned on, the mode will
always be switched to the ECO Mode in
“Off”.

o On Screen Display
Always display the meter on the TV screen.

Auto
(Default):

Display the meter when changing the mode
or volume.

Off:

Do not display the meter.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

The unit goes into standby after 60 minutes.

30 min:

The unit goes into standby after 30 minutes.

15 min:

The unit goes into standby after 15 minutes.

Off
(Default):

The unit does not go into standby
automatically.

n ZONE2 / ZONE3

Display the power consumption of this unit using a meter on the TV
screen.
Always On:

60 min:

When there are no operations for a certain period of time as set here,
the power is automatically shut off even if there is audio or video input.

255

8 hours:

Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 the standby state
after about 8 hours.

4 hours:

Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 to the standby
state after about 4 hours.

2 hours:

Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 to the standby
state after about 2 hours.

Off
(Default):

Does not automatically switch ZONE2/
ZONE3 to the standby state.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Appendix

o Lch Level

ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup

Adjust the left channel output level.

Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2 and ZONE3.

-12 dB – +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)

o Rch Level

Values set for “Volume Limit” and “Power On Volume” are displayed according to the
setting specified for the volume “Scale”. (v p. 186)

Adjust the right channel output level.
-12 dB – +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)

o Bass

o Channel

Adjust bass.
-10 dB – +10 dB (Default : 0 dB)

Set whether to playback in stereo or monaural.

o Treble
Adjust treble.
-10 dB – +10 dB (Default : 0 dB)

Stereo
(Default):

Stereo playback.

Mono:

Monaural playback.

o HDMI Audio (ZONE2 only)

o High Pass Filter

Selects the audio signal format for playing an HDMI source in ZONE2.

Make settings for cutting the low range to reduce distortion in the bass.
On:

The low range is attenuated.

Off
(Default):

The low range is not attenuated.

Front panel

Tips

Display

Through The HDMI audio signal is passed through this unit to the
(Default): device in ZONE2.
PCM:

Rear panel

256

The HDMI audio signal input into this unit is converted to a
PCM signal that can be output from the ZONE2 PRE OUT
terminals or speaker terminals.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Volume Level

Tips

Appendix

o Power On Volume

Set the volume output level.

Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.

Variable
(Default):

Last
(Default):

Use the memorized setting from the last
session.

Mute:

Always use the muting on condition.

Volume can be adjusted.

Volume is fixed at the desired level. The
1 – 98
volume cannot be adjusting using the remote
(–79.5 dB – 18.0 dB):
control unit.

1 – 98
The volume is adjusted to the set level.
(–79.5 dB – 18.0 dB):

o Volume Limit
Make a setting for maximum volume.

This can be set when “Volume Level” is set to “Variable”. (v p. 257)

60 (-20 dB) / 70 (-10 dB) / 80 (0 dB)
(Default : 70 (-10 dB))
Off:

o Mute Level

Do not set a maximum volume.

Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.

This can be set when “Volume Level” is set to “Variable”. (v p. 257)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

257

Full
(Default):

The sound is muted entirely.

–40 dB :

The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.

–20 dB :

The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Zone Rename

Select the conditions for activating trigger out.
For details about how to connect the DC OUT jacks, see “DC OUT
jacks” (v p. 76).

MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3
Set Defaults: The default setting is restored for the edited zone name.

n When setting for zone (MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 /
ZONE3)

Trigger out is activated through linkage to the power of the zone set to
“On”.

Up to 10 characters can be input.
For character input, see “Using the keyboard screen” (v p. 180).

n When setting for input source

Smart Select Names

Activates trigger out when the input source set to “On” is selected.

n When setting for HDMI monitor

Change the smart select name that appears on the TV screen to one you
prefer.

Activates trigger out when the HDMI monitor set to “On” is selected.

Smart Select 1 / Smart Select 2 / Smart Select 3 / Smart Select 4
The default setting is restored for the edited smart select
name.

On:

Activate trigger on this mode.

– – –:

Do not activate trigger on this mode.

Up to 16 characters can be input.
For character input, see “Using the keyboard screen” (v p. 180).

Front panel

Appendix

Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2

Change the display title of each zone to one you prefer.

Set Defaults:

Tips

Display

Rear panel

258

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Front Display

Tips

Appendix

Information

Makes settings related to the display on this unit.

Show information about this unit settings, input signals, etc.

o Dimmer

o Audio

Adjust the display brightness of this unit.

Show the audio information for MAIN ZONE.

Bright
(Default):

Normal display brightness.

Sound Mode: The currently set sound mode.

Dim:

Reduced display brightness.

Dark:

Very low display brightness.

Off:

Turns the display off.

Input Signal: The input signal type.
Format:

Sample Rate: The input signal’s sampling frequency.

You can also adjust the display by pressing DIMMER on the main unit.

o Channel Indicators

Offset:

The dialogue normalization correction value.

Flag:

This is displayed when inputting signals including a
surround back channel. “MATRIX” is displayed with
DTS-ES Matrix input signals, “DISCRETE” with DTSES Discrete signals.

Sets whether to use the input signal display or output signal display for
the channel indication on the display.
Input:

Uses the input signal display for the
channel indication on the display.

Output
(Default):

Uses the output signal display for the
channel indication on the display.

Front panel

Display

The number of input signal channels (presence of
front, surround, LFE).

Rear panel

259

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Notifications

o Video

Displays and sets notifications.
Also, sets whether or not to display the notification when the power is
turned on.

Show the HDMI input/output signals and HDMI monitor information for
MAIN ZONE.
HDMI Signal Info.

Notification Alerts

Resolution / Color Space / Pixel Depth
HDMI Monitor 1 / HDMI Monitor 2
Interface / Resolutions

On
(Default):

Notification messages are displayed.

Off:

Notification messages are not displayed.

o ZONE
Show information about current settings.
MAIN ZONE:

This item shows information about settings for
MAIN ZONE. The information displayed differs
according to the input source.

ZONE2:

This item shows information about settings for
ZONE2.

Press INFO on the remote control unit to display current source name, volume,
sound mode name, and other information at the bottom of the screen.

SOURCE
SOUND
SIGNAL

This item shows information about settings for
ZONE3.

ZONE3:

AUDYSSEY

Blu-ray
DOLBY TrueHD
DOLBY TrueHD
MultEQ XT32 : Reference
Dynamic EQ : On
Dynamic Volume : Medium
INPUT SIGNAL
FWL
SL

o Firmware

FHR

C
LFE

SBR

SBL

ACTIVE SPEAKERS
FWR
SR

FL
SL
SBL

C
SW1

FR
SR
SBR

50.0

Displays information for the current firmware.

Front panel

EXT

Display

Rear panel

Version:

FHL

260

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Usage Data
To help us improve our products and customer service, Marantz collects
anonymous information about how you use your AV receiver (such as
frequently used input sources and sound modes and speaker settings).
Marantz will never provide any information we collect to third parties.
Yes: Provide information on the operating status of this unit.
No:

Do not provide information on the operating status of this unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

261

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Notifications

Firmware
Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades,
updates the firmware, and sets up the notification message display for
updates and upgrades.

When the latest firmware is available, a notification message is
displayed on the TV screen at power on.
The notification message is displayed for about 40 seconds when the
power is turned on.

o Update

Update

Updates the firmware of this unit.
Check for
Update:

Checks to see if the firmware is the latest version. You
can also check approximately how long it will take to
complete an update.

Update
Start:

Execute the update process. When the update starts,
the menu screen is shut down. During the update, the
progress is shown on the display.

On
(Default):

Display update message.

Off:

Do not display update message.

Upgrade
On
(Default):

Display upgrade message.

Off:

Do not display upgrade message.

This unit automatically retries updating if updating fails. If the update still fails,
either one of the following messages will appear on the screen. If the display
reads as shown below, check the settings and network environment, then update
again.

Display

Description

Updating fail

Updating failed.

Failure to log into server.

Server is busy

Server is busy. Wait a while then try again.

Connection fail

Failure in connecting to server.

Download fail

Downloading of the firmware has failed.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

262

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Add New Feature

Appendix

Notes concerning use of “Update” and “Add New Feature”

Display new features that can be downloaded to this unit and perform
an upgrade.
Upgrade
Package:

Display the items to be upgraded.

Upgrade
Status:

Display a list of the additional functions provided by
the upgrade.

Upgrade Start:

Execute the upgrade process.
When the upgrade starts, the menu screen is shut
down. During the upgrade, the amount of upgrade
time which has elapsed is displayed.

0 In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system

requirements and settings for an Internet connection. (v p. 73)

0 Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrading is completed.
0 Approximately 1 hour is required for the updating/upgrading procedure

to be completed.

0 Once updating/upgrade starts, normal operations on this unit cannot

be performed until updating/upgrading is completed. Furthermore,
there may be cases where backup data is reset for the parameters,
etc., set on this unit.

0 If the update or upgrade fails, press and hold the X on the main unit for

more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord. “Update
Retry” appears on the display and update restarts from the point at
which update failed. If the error continues despite this, check the
network environment.

0 See the Marantz website for details about upgrades.
0 When the procedure is complete, “Registered” is displayed in this menu and
upgrades can be carried out. If the procedure has not been carried out, “Not
Registered” is displayed.
The ID number shown on this screen is needed when carrying out the
procedure.
The ID number can also be displayed by pressing and holding the main unit’s
o and SETUP for at least 3 seconds.
0 If the upgrade is not successful, an error message identical to those in
“Firmware” - “Update” will appear on the display. Check the settings and
network environment and then perform the upgrade again.

Front panel

Tips

Display

Rear panel

Information regarding the “Update” function and “Add New Feature” will be
announced on the Marantz web site each time related plans are defined.

263

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Setup Lock
Protect settings from inadvertent changes.

o Lock
On:

Turn protection on.

Off
(Default):

Turn protection off.

When cancelling the setting, set “Lock” to “Off”.

NOTE
When “Lock” is set to “On”, no setting items are displayed except for “Setup
Lock”.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

264

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Operating external devices with the remote control unit
When preset codes are registered in the included remote control unit, it
can then be used to operate any devices you have, such as DVD players
or TVs made by different manufacturers.

SET

AVR

Input source
select buttons

CH/PAGE d
INFO

OPTION
ENTER

SMART
SELECT
1–4

0–9

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

265

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

n Registering DVD Players

Registering preset codes

There are two methods for registering preset codes; the simple method for
registering preset codes of Marantz players, the method for registering the
preset numbers of other manufacturers’ devices, and the method for
experimenting with preset codes one by one for registration.
● “Registering Marantz Players”(v p. 266）
● “Registering by entering preset numbers”(v p. 267）

Press and hold down DVD and OPTION until “OK”
indicator on the remote control display is flashing, then
release.

n Registering CD Players

o Registering Marantz Players
Use the following simple method to register the preset codes of
Marantz Blu-ray Disc players, DVD players and CD players.

Press and hold down CD and OPTION until “OK”
indicator on the remote control display is flashing, then
release.

n Registering Blu-ray Disc Players

Press and hold down Blu-ray and OPTION until “OK”
indicator on the remote control display is flashing, then
release.

Front panel

Display

Appendix

Rear panel

266

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

n Registering multiple players at the same time

Blu-ray Disc DVD player CD player
player
P

Before starting, confirm the preset number of the device that you want
to register and the buttons that can be registered in the “Preset Code
Table” (v p. 339) in the Appendix.

P
P
P

Press and hold down
the buttons

SMART SELECT 1 and
OPTION

SMART SELECT 2 and
OPTION

SMART SELECT 3 and
OPTION

SMART SELECT 4 and
OPTION

NOTE

Display

Rear panel

Press and hold down the input source select button
that you want to register the preset code to and SET
until “PRSET” indicator on the remote control display
is flashing, then release.
Enter the preset number (4 digits) listed for the device
in the Preset Code Table using the number buttons (0 –
9) on the remote control.

0 Some manufacturers use more than one type of remote control code. Preset
codes to change the number and verify correct operation.
0 If the AV device is not a Marantz device, or if the device does not operate even
when the preset code is registered, use the learning function. Remote codes for
different devices can be remembered for use by the Marantz remote control
included with this device. (v p. 339)

Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons may
not operate. In this case, try “Registering by entering preset numbers” (v p. 267).

Front panel

Appendix

o Registering by entering preset numbers

Press and hold down the SMART SELECT 1 – 4 and
OPTION until “OK” indicator on the remote control
display is flashing, then release.
Devices to be registered at the
same time

Tips

NOTE
Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons may
not operate.

267

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Experimenting with preset codes one by one
for registration

1
2
3

Tips

Switch the power on of the device for which you want
to set the preset code.
Press and hold down the input source select button
that you want to register the preset code to and SET
until “PRSET” indicator on the remote control display
is flashing, then release.

NOTE
Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons may
not operate.

Aim the remote control at the appliance and slowly
alternate between pressing CH/PAGE d and DEVICE X
for the appliance.

The preset code is shown in the remote control display.

4
5

Stop when the appliance turns off.
Press ENTER once to lock in the code.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

268

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n TV group
(TV) operation

Operating devices
To operate an external device, press the input source button registered
with the preset code, followed by one of the buttons in the following tables.
0 When operating an external device, the display on the remote control unit shows
the input source name.
0 The “TV” indicator lights when the TV is being operated.
0 To operate the menu of this unit, press AVR before operating the unit. The “AVR”
indicator lights when this unit is being operated.

Operation buttons

Function

TV X

TV power on/off

TV INPUT

Switch TV input

TV MENU

TV menu

CH/PAGE df

Switch channels (up/down)

INFO

Information

OPTION

Sub menu, Option

uiop

Cursor operation

ENTER(Cursor)

Enter

BACK

Back

Skip chapter

Playback

Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

Pause

Stop

0 – 9, +10

Channel selection

TV X and TV INPUT buttons can be operated at any time without
pressing the TV button.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

269

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

n DVD group
(DVD player / DVD recorder) operation

Tips

Appendix

n CD group
(CD player / CD recorder) operation
Operation buttons Function

Operation buttons Function
DEVICE X

Power on/off

DEVICE X

Power on/off

DEVICE MENU

(Popup) Menu

DEVICE MENU

(Popup) Menu

INFO

Information

INFO

Information

OPTION

Top menu

uiop

Cursor operation

uiop

Cursor operation

ENTER

Enter

ENTER

Enter

Stop

BACK

Back

Pause

SETUP

Setup

Playback

Stop

Skip chapter

Pause

Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

Playback

Skip chapter

0 – 9, +10

Select title, chapter or channel
selection

Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

0 – 9, +10

Select title, chapter or channel
selection

Depending on the device, the DEVICE X button only performs
the power-on operation.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

270

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n BD group
(Blu-ray Disc player) operation

n CBL/SAT group
(Set top box for satellite (SAT)/cable TV (CBL)/
Media player/IP TV) operation

Operation buttons Function

Operation buttons

Function

DEVICE X

Power on/off

DEVICE MENU

CH/PAGE df

Switch channels (up/down)

INFO

Information

uiop

Cursor operation

ENTER

Enter

BACK

Back

SETUP

Setup

HOME

Home menu

Stop

Pause

Playback

Skip chapter

Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

0 – 9, +10

Channel selection

DEVICE X

Power on/off

DEVICE MENU

(Popup) Menu

INFO

Information

OPTION

Top menu

uiop

Cursor operation

ENTER

Enter

BACK

Back

SETUP

Setup

HOME

Home menu

Stop

Pause

Playback

Skip chapter

Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

0 – 9, +10

Select title, chapter or channel
selection

Depending on the device, the DEVICE X button only performs
the power-on operation.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

271

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Check the registered preset code

1
2

Tips

Initializing registered preset codes

Press and hold an input source select button for which
you want to check the preset code and the SET button
until the display on the remote control unit shows
“PRSET”.

Press and hold down AVR and OPTION until “OK”
indicator on the remote control display is flashing, then
release.

Press INFO.
The set code is shown for 3 seconds in the remote control display.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

272

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Operating learn function
If the device does not operate even when the preset code is registered,
use the learning function. Remote codes for different devices can be
remembered for use by the Marantz remote control included with this
device.

SET
TV AUDIO

CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
AUX1
GAME
AUX2
MEDIA PLAYER
CD

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

273

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Remembering remote control codes
from other devices

1
2
3

6
7

Place the Marantz remote control and remote control
from the other device approximately 5 cm apart, with
the remote control signal transmission sections facing
each other.

Press and hold SET until the LEARN indicator blinks.

Repeat steps 4 and 5 to learn other buttons for the
same input source.
When programming of the remote control unit is
completed, press SET.

0 There are some remote control units that cannot be programmed, or even if they
can be programmed, they may not operate correctly. If this happens, use the
remote control unit supplied with the AV equipment to operate it.
0 If the remote control memory becomes full, “FULL” is shown on the remote control
display. If you want to learn the code, you should erase other learned button.

Press input source select buttons to select the input
source.

NOTE

Select the button to be learned.

0 The learning function is unavailable for all ZONE SELECT, SET, AVR, POWER X,
VOLUME df, SMART SELECT, SOUND MODE and input source select buttons
in any mode.
0 If no buttons are pressed for approximately 1 minutes while in the LEARN mode,
the remote control unit automatically exits from the LEARN mode.

LEARN indicator lights up.

Press and hold the button that you want to register on
the other remote control until “OK” is displayed on the
Marantz remote control display.
0 If “NG” is shown on the remote control display, perform step 4

again.

Front panel

Display

Appendix

The LEARN indicator turns off, and the remote control unit exits
learn mode.

The input source is shown in the remote control display.

Tips

Rear panel

274

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

1
2

Codes can be erased in three ways: by buttons, sources, and by all
memory contents.

o Delete remote control codes for each button
Press and hold SET until the LEARN indicator blinks.

Press input source select buttons to select the input
source you want to delete.

1
2

Press SET.
0 The LEARN indicator turn off.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Press and hold POWER X and press the learned input
source select buttons to be erased twice.
Press SET.
0 The LEARN indicator turn off.

o Delete remote control codes for all input
sources

Press and hold POWER X and press the learned button
to be erased twice.

“ERASE” is shown in the remote control display.

Press and hold SET until the LEARN indicator blinks.

“ERASE” is shown in the remote control display.

The input source is shown in the remote control display.

Appendix

o Delete remote control codes for each input
source

Delete saved remote control codes

1
2

Tips

275

Press and hold SET until the LEARN indicator blinks.
Press and hold POWER X and press AVR twice.
“ERASE” is shown in the remote control display.

Press SET.
0 The LEARN indicator turn off.

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Setting the back light
You can turn off the backlight of the remote control unit.
0 Backlight is set on in the factory settings.

Disabling the backlight

SET

Press and hold both SET and Light button until “OFF”
indicator flashes twice.

Turning the backlight on

Light button

Press and hold both SET and Light button until “ON”
indicator flashes twice.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

276

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Specifying the zone used with the remote control unit

ZONE
SELECT

When the ZONE SELECT is pressed, only the set zone can be operated
with the remote control unit.
This is useful for preventing mistaken operation.
0 The factory setting is “M23”.

SET

1
2

Press and hold ZONE SELECT and SET for at least 3
seconds.
Use ui to set the zone to be used and press ENTER.
“SET” flashes four times on the remote control unit and the normal
operation mode is restored.
Remote control unit display

MAIN ZONE only

MAIN ZONE / ZONE2

M23

MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3

ui
ENTER

Zone to be used

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

277

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Contents

Troubleshooting

Tips

Power does not turn on / Power is turned off

282

Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit

283

Display on this unit shows nothing

283

No sound comes out

284

Desired sound does not come out

285

Sound is interrupted or noise occurs

287
288

I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake

279

I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on

279

I want to have the subwoofer always output audio

279

I want to make human voices in the movies clearer

279

I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume
level

279

No video is shown on the TV

I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content
such as TV and movies

The menu screen is not displayed on the TV

290

279

iPod cannot be played back

291

USB memory devices cannot be played back

292

File names on the iPod/USB memory device are not displayed
properly

293

Bluetooth cannot be played back

293

I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the
configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new
one
280
I want to combine a desired video with the current music

280

I want to play back photos from Flickr at the same time while listening
to the Internet radio
280
I want to delete unused input sources

280

I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc.

280

I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I’m playing a game
on my game console
280

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

278

The Internet radio cannot be played back

294

Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back

295

Various online services cannot be played

295

The HDMI control function does not work

296

When it is not possible to connect to a wireless LAN network

297

When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly

298

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Tips
I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake
0 Set the volume upper limit for “Volume Limit” in the menu beforehand. This prevents children or others from increasing the volume too much by mistake.

You can set this for each zone. (v p. 186, 257)

I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on
0 By default, the volume setting when power was previously set to standby on this unit is applied at next power on with no change. To use a fixed volume

level, set the volume level at power on for “Power On Volume” in the menu. You can set this for each zone. (v p. 186, 257)

I want to have the subwoofer always output audio
0 Depending on the input signals and sound mode, the subwoofer may not output audio. When “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”, you

can have the subwoofer always output audio. (v p. 243)

I want to make human voices in the movies clearer
0 Select a setting that makes the dialog easier to hear in the option menu “Dialog Enhancer”. (v p. 136)

I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume level
0 Set “Dynamic EQ” in the menu to “On”. This setting corrects the frequency characteristics to allow you to enjoy clear sound without the bass being lost

even during playback at a lower volume level. (v p. 188)

I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content such as TV and movies
0 Set “Dynamic Volume” in the menu. Volume level changes (between quiet scenes and loud scenes) in TV shows or movies are automatically adjusted

to your desired level. (v p. 189)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

279

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new
one.
0 Perform Audyssey® Setup. This automatically makes the optimized speaker settings for the new listening environment. (v p. 210)

I want to combine a desired video with the current music
0 Set “Video Select” in the option menu to “On”. You can combine the current music with your desired video source from a Set-top Box or DVD, etc. while

listening to music from the Tuner, CD, Phono, Internet radio or Bluetooth. (v p. 139)

I want to play back photos from Flickr at the same time while listening to the Internet radio
0 After playing back photos from Flickr, start the slide show on the Internet radio playback screen. (v p. 135)

I want to delete unused input sources
0 Set unused input sources for “Hide Sources” in the menu. This allows you to skip unused input sources when turning the INPUT SELECTOR knob on

this unit. (v p. 208)

I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc.
0 Set “All Zone Stereo” in the option menu to “Start”. You can simultaneously play back music in another room (ZONE2, ZONE3) that is played back in

MAIN ZONE. (v p. 141)

I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I’m playing a game on my game console
0 When the video is delayed against button operations with the controller on the game console, set “Video Mode” in the menu to “Game”. (v p. 199)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

280

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Troubleshooting
If a problem should arise, first check the following:
1. Are the connections correct?
2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner’s manual?
3. Are the other devices operating properly?
If this unit does not operate properly, check the corresponding symptoms in this section.
If the symptoms do not match any of those described here, consult your dealer as it could be due to a fault in this unit. In this case, disconnect the power
immediately and contact the store where you purchased this unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

281

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Power does not turn on / Power is turned off
Symptom

Cause / Solution

Page

Power does not turn on.

0 Check whether the power plug is correctly inserted into the power outlet.

Power automatically turns
off.

0 The sleep timer is set. Turn on the power again.

157

0 “Auto Standby” is set. “Auto Standby” is triggered when there is no operation for a set amount of time. To

255

Power turns off and the
power indicator flashes in
red approx. every 2
seconds.

0 The protection circuit has been activated due to a rise in temperature within this unit. Turn the power off,

327

0 Please re-install this unit in a place having good ventilation.

－

Power turns off and the
power indicator flashes in
red approx. every 0.5
seconds.

0 Check the speaker connections. The protection circuit may have been activated because speaker cable

0 Turn down the volume and turn on the power again.

0 This unit’s amplifier circuit has failed. Unplug the power cord and contact our customer service center.

－

The power to this unit does 0 Power in either ZONE2 or ZONE3 is on. To turn off the power of the device (standby), press either the
not turn off when you press
ZONE2 ON/OFF or ZONE3 ON/OFF button on the main unit, or press the POWER X button after
the Power operation
pressing the Z2 or Z3 button on the remote control to turn off the power of ZONE2 or ZONE3.
button. “ZONE2 On” or
“ZONE3 On” appears on
the display.

－

disable “Auto Standby”, set “Auto Standby” on the menu to “Off”.

Front panel

wait about an hour until this unit cools down sufficiently, and then turn the power on again.

core wires came in contact with each other or a core wire was disconnected from the connector and
came in contact with the rear panel of this unit. After unplugging the power cord, take corrective action
such as firmly re-twisting the core wire or taking care of the connector, and then reconnect the wire.

Display

Rear panel

282

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit
Symptom
Operations cannot be
performed through the
remote control unit.

Cause / Solution

Page

0 Batteries are worn out. Replace with new batteries.

0 Operate the remote control unit within a distance of about 23 ft/7 m from this unit and at an angle of within

30°.

0 Remove any obstacle between this unit and the remote control unit.

－

0 Insert the batteries in the proper direction, checking the q and w marks.

0 The set’s remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb

－

0 The operation target zone does not correspond to the zone setting specified on the remote control unit.

178

0 The remote control unit operating mode is used to operate other devices. Press MAIN to set the operating

269

light, etc.). Move the set to a place in which the remote control sensor will not be exposed to strong light.

Press ZONE SELECT to select the zone to operate.

mode to AVR.

0 When using a 3D video device, the remote control unit of this unit may not function due to effects of

infrared communications between units (such as TV and glasses for 3D viewing). In this case, adjust the
direction of units with the 3D communications function and their distance to ensure they do not affect
operations from the remote control unit of this unit.

－

o Display on this unit shows nothing
Symptom
Display is off.

Front panel

Cause / Solution

Page

0 Set “Dimmer” on the menu to something other than “Off”.

259

0 When the sound mode is set to “Pure Direct”, the display is off.

144

Display

Rear panel

283

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o No sound comes out
Symptom
No sound comes out of
speakers.

Cause / Solution

Page

0 Check the connections for all devices.

0 Insert connection cables all the way in.

－

0 Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected.

－

0 Check cables for damage.

－

0 Check that speaker cables are properly connected. Check that cable core wires come in contact with the

0 Securely tighten the speaker terminals. Check speaker terminals for looseness.

0 Check that a proper input source is selected.

0 Adjust the volume.

metal part on speaker terminals.

0 Cancel the mute mode.

0 Check the digital audio input connector setting.

206

0 Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, the digital audio output

－

0 When a headphone is plugged into the PHONES jack on the main unit, sound is not output from the

－

No sound comes out when
using the DVI-D
connection.

0 When this unit is connected to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector, no sound is output. Make a

－

No sound comes out of a
TV that is connected via
HDMI.

0 Audio signals input to 7.1CH IN connectors on this unit cannot be output to the TV.

－

is set to off by default.

speaker terminal and PRE OUT connector.

Front panel

separate audio connection.

Display

Rear panel

284

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Desired sound does not come out
Symptom
The volume does not
increase.

Cause / Solution

Page

0 The maximum volume is set too low. Set the maximum volume using “Limit” on the menu.
0 Appropriate volume correction processing is performed according to the input audio format and settings,

so the volume may not reach the upper limit.

No sound comes out with
the HDMI connection.

0 Check the connection of the HDMI connectors.

60
196

0 When using the HDMI control function, check that the audio output is set to the AV amplifier on the TV.

156

0 Check that speaker cables are properly connected.

0 Check that a selection other than “None” is set for the “Speaker Config.” setting in menu.

236

0 Check the “Assign Mode” setting in the menu.

221

0 When the sound mode is “Stereo” and “Virtual”, audio is only output from the front speakers and subwoofer.

No sound is produced from 0 Check the subwoofer connections.
subwoofer.
0 Turn on the subwoofer’s power.

－

0 Set “Speaker Config.” - “Subwoofer” in the menu to “1 spkr” or “2 spkrs”.

236

0 When “Speaker Config.” - “Front” in the menu is set to “Large”, depending on the input signal and the

236

0 When no subwoofer audio signal (LFE) is included in the input signals, no sound may be output from the

243

0 You can make the subwoofer always output sound by setting the “Subwoofer Mode” to “LFE+Main”.

243

subwoofer.

0 Check that the digital audio output setting on the connected device is set to “DTS”.

－

0 Set “Decode Mode” on the menu to “Auto” or “DTS”.

Dolby Atmos, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD, Dolby
Digital Plus audio is not
output.

Front panel

－
40

sound mode, no sound may be output from the subwoofer.

DTS sound is not output.

－

0 When outputting HDMI audio from the speakers, set “HDMI Audio Out” on the menu to “AVR”. To output

from the TV, set “TV”.

No sound comes out of a
specific speaker.

186

209

0 Make HDMI connections.

0 Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, “PCM” is set by

－

default.

Display

Rear panel

285

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Symptom

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Cause / Solution

Page

DTS Neo:X mode cannot
be selected.

0 It cannot be selected when “Speaker Config.” - “Surround” is set for “None”.
0 DTS Neo:X cannot be selected when using the headphones.

236
－

Dolby Surround mode
cannot be selected.

0 Dolby Surround cannot be selected when using the headphones.

－

Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, 0 These cannot be selected when you have not performed Audyssey® Setup.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ®,
0 Switch to a sound mode other than “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.
Audyssey Dynamic
0 These cannot be selected when using the headphones.
®
Volume and Audyssey
LFC™ cannot be selected.

210

Audyssey DSX® cannot be 0 It can be selected when using the front height or front wide speakers.
selected.
0 It can be selected when using the center speaker.

237

144
－

236

0 Switch the sound mode to Dolby sound mode or DTS sound mode.

143

0 This cannot be selected when using the headphones.

－

0 This cannot be set when the input signal is a 2-channel source.

－

“M-DAX” cannot be
selected.

0 Check that an analog signal or PCM signal (Sample Rate = 44.1/48 kHz) is input. For playback of

185

0 Switch to a sound mode other than “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.

144

No audio is output from
PRE OUT or speakers for
ZONE2/ZONE3.

0 In ZONE2/ZONE3, the audio can be played back when signals input from digital connectors (OPTICAL/

multichannel signals such as Dolby Digital or DTS surround, “M-DAX” cannot be used.

COAXIAL) are in 2ch PCM format.

0 In ZONE2, the audio can be played back when signals input from the HDMI connector are in 2ch PCM

format. To play back the audio in ZONE2 irrespective of the input signal format, set “HDMI Audio” in the
menu to “PCM”. Depending on the played back device, the audio may not be played back even with this
setting. In that case, set the audio format to “PCM (2ch)” on the played back device.

0 When listening to audio from a Bluetooth device in ZONE2/ZONE3, remove any obstructions between the

Bluetooth device and this unit and use it within a range of about 32.8 ft/10 m.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

286

Remote

Index

－
256

－

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Sound is interrupted or noise occurs
Symptom
During playback from the
Internet radio or USB
memory device, sound is
occasionally interrupted.

Cause / Solution

Page

0 When the transfer speed of the USB memory device is slow, sound may occasionally be interrupted.

－

0 The network communication speed is slow or the radio station is busy.

－

When making a call on
iPhone, noise occurs in
audio output on this unit.

0 When making a call, keep a distance of 0.7 ft/20 cm or longer between iPhone and this unit.

－

Noise often occurs in
FM/AM broadcasting.

0 Change the antenna orientation or position.

The sounds appear to be
distorted.

0 Separate the AM loop antenna from the unit.

－

0 Use an FM outdoor antenna.

0 Separate the antenna from other connection cables.

0 Lower the volume.

0 Set “Off” to the ECO Mode. When “On” or “Auto” is in the ECO Mode, the audio may by distorted when

the playback volume is high.

Sound cuts out when using 0 If nearby devices cause playback to cut out due to electronic interference, switch to a wired LAN
Wi-Fi connection.
connection.
0 Particularly when you play back large music files, depending on your wireless LAN environment, the

playback sound may be interrupted. In this case, make the wired LAN connection.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

287

Remote

Index

254
73
248

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o No video is shown on the TV
Symptom
No picture appears.

Cause / Solution

Page

0 Check the connections for all devices.

0 Insert connection cables all the way in.

－

0 Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected.

－

0 Check cables for damage.

－

0 Match the input settings to the input connector of the TV connected to this unit.

206

0 Check that the proper input source is selected.

0 Check the video input connector setting.

206

0 Check that the resolution of the player corresponds to that of the TV.

260

0 Check whether the TV is compatible with copyright protection (HDCP). If connected to a device not

302

0 The HDMI signal cannot be converted to an analog signal. Use analog connections.

303

compatible with HDCP, video will not be output correctly.

0 Use an “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet” or “High speed cable” that comes with the HDMI logo if

－

No video is shown on the
TV with the DVI-D
connection.

0 With the DVI-D connection, on some device combinations, devices may not function properly due to the

302

No video from an input
source such as a game
console is shown on the
TV.

0 When special video signals are input from a game console, etc., the video conversion function may not

－

While the menu is being
displayed, no video is
shown on the TV.

0 The video being played will not appear in the background of the menu when the menu is operated during

－

you wish to playback 4K (60/50 Hz) video.

Front panel

copy guard copyright protection (HDCP).

function. Connect the input connector to the monitor output connector of the same type.

playback of the following video signals.
- Some images of 3D video contents
- Computer resolution images (example: VGA)
- Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3
- 4K video

Display

Rear panel

288

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Symptom

Settings

Tips

Cause / Solution

Page

When using HDMI ZONE2, 0 When ZONE2 is operated with the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, video in
the video output in MAIN
MAIN ZONE may be interrupted.
ZONE is interrupted.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

289

Remote

Appendix

Index

－

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o The menu screen is not displayed on the TV
Symptom
The menu screen or status
information screen is not
displayed on the TV.

Cause / Solution

Page

0 The menu screen is only displayed on this unit and a TV connected with an HDMI cable. If this unit is

connected to a TV using a different video output connector, operate while watching the display on this
unit.

0 The status information will not appear on the TV when the following video signals are being played.

143

0 When a 2D video is converted to a 3D video on the TV, the menu screen or status information screen is

143

0 In the pure direct playback mode, the menu screen or status information is not displayed. Switch to a

143

0 Set the “TV Format” setting in the menu to a selection that is appropriate for the TV.

205

- Some images of 3D video content
- Computer resolution images (example: VGA)
- Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3

not displayed properly.

sound mode other than the pure direct mode.

Front panel

－

Display

Rear panel

290

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o iPod cannot be played back
Symptom

Cause / Solution

Page

iPod cannot be connected. 0 When using iPod by connecting it to the USB port, some iPod variations are not supported.
0 When iPod is connected by using a USB cable other than the genuine cable, iPod may not be

－

0 This unit and PC / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad are not connected to the same network (LAN). Connect it to

0 The firmware on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is not compatible with AirPlay. Update the firmware to

－

0 The volume on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is set to the minimum level. The volume on iTunes /

－

recognized. Use a genuine USB cable.

The AirPlay icon ' is not
displayed on iTunes /
iPhone / iPod touch / iPad.

the same LAN as this unit.
the latest version.

Audio is not output.

iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is linked with the volume on this unit. Set a proper volume level.

0 The AirPlay playback is not performed, or this unit is not selected. Click the AirPlay icon ' on the

128

0 Quit the application running in the background of the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad, and then play using

－

0 Some external factors may be affecting the wireless connection. Modify the network environment by

－

0 Enable the “Allow iTunes audio control from remote speakers” setting on iTunes. Then, you can perform

－

iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad screen and select this unit.

Audio is interrupted during
the AirPlay playback on
iPhone / iPod touch / iPad.

AirPlay.

taking measures such as shortening the distance from the wireless LAN access point.

iTunes cannot be played
back through the remote
control unit.

Front panel

playback, pause, and skip operations through the remote control unit.

Display

Rear panel

291

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o USB memory devices cannot be played back
Symptom
“No connection” is
displayed.

Cause / Solution

Page

0 This unit cannot recognize the USB memory device. Disconnect and reconnect the USB memory device.

0 Mass storage class compatible USB memory devices are supported.

－

0 This unit does not support a connection through a USB hub. Connect the USB memory device directly to

－

0 The USB memory device must be formatted to FAT16 or FAT32.

－

0 Not all USB memory devices are guaranteed to work. Some USB memory devices are not recognized.

－

0 Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed.

0 This unit is able to display files in a maximum of eight folder layers. A maximum of 5000 files (folders) can

－

the USB port.

When using a type of portable hard disc drive compatible with the USB connection that requires power
from an AC adapter, use the AC adapter that came with the drive.

Files on the USB memory
device are not displayed.

also be displayed for each layer. Modify the folder structure of the USB memory device.

Files on a USB memory
device cannot be played.

0 When multiple partitions exist on the USB memory device, only files on the first partition are displayed.

－

0 Files are created in a format that is not supported by this unit. Check the formats supported by this unit.

305

0 You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files that are copyright protected cannot be

－

0 Playback may not be possible if the album art file size exceeds 2 MB.

－

played on this unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

292

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o File names on the iPod/USB memory device are not displayed properly
Symptom
The file names are not
displayed properly (“...”,
etc.).

Cause / Solution

Page

0 Characters that cannot be displayed have been used. On this unit, characters that cannot be displayed

are replaced with a “. (period)”.

－

o Bluetooth cannot be played back
Symptom
Bluetooth devices cannot
be connected to this unit.

The sound is cut off.

Cause / Solution

Page

0 The Bluetooth function in the Bluetooth device has not been enabled. See the Owner’s Manual of the

－

0 Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit.

－

Bluetooth device to enable the Bluetooth function.

0 The Bluetooth device cannot connect with this unit if it is not compatible with the A2DP profile.

－

0 Turn the power of the Bluetooth device off and on again, and then try again.

－

0 Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit.

－

0 Remove obstructions between the Bluetooth device and this unit.

－

0 To prevent electromagnetic interference, locate this unit away from microwave ovens, wireless LAN

－

0 Reconnect the Bluetooth device.

－

devices and other Bluetooth devices.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

293

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o The Internet radio cannot be played back
Symptom

Cause / Solution

Page

A list of broadcasting
stations is not displayed.

0 The LAN cable is not properly connected, or the network is disconnected. Check the connection status.

Internet Radio cannot be
played.

0 The selected radio station is broadcasting in a format that is not supported by this unit. Formats that can

0 Perform the network diagnostic mode.

73
－

be played back in this unit are MP3, WMA and AAC.

0 The firewall function is enabled on the router. Check the firewall setting.

308
－

0 The IP address is not properly set.

250

0 Check the power of the router is on.

－

0 To obtain the IP address automatically, enable the DHCP server function on the router. Also, set the

250

0 To obtain the IP address manually, set the IP address and proxy on this unit.

250

0 Some radio stations broadcast silently during some time period. In this case, no audio is output. Wait for a

106

DHCP setting to “On” on this unit.

while and select the same radio station, or select another radio station.

Cannot connect to favorite
radio stations.

0 Radio station is not currently in service. Register radio stations in service.

－

For some radio stations,
“Connection down” is
displayed and station
cannot be connected to.

0 The selected radio station is not in service. Select a radio station in service.

－

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

294

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back
Symptom
Files stored on a computer
cannot be played.

Cause / Solution

Page

0 Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record in a compatible format.

307

0 Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit.

－

0 The set’s USB port cannot be used for connection to a computer.

－

0 Media sharing settings are not correct. Change media sharing settings so that the unit can access the

folders on your computer.

Server is not found, or it is
not possible to connect to
the server.

0 The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated. Check the computer’s or router’s firewall settings.

－

0 Computer’s power is not turned on. Turn on the power.

－

0 Server is not running. Launch the server.

－

0 Set’s IP address is wrong. Check the set’s IP address.

Music files on PC cannot
be played back.

247

0 Even if PC is connected to the USB port on this unit, music files on it cannot be played back. Connect PC

to this unit through the network.

Files on PC or NAS are not 0 Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed.
displayed.
Music stored on a NAS
cannot be played.

110

73
307

0 If you use a NAS in conformity with the DLNA standard, enable the DLNA server function in the NAS

setting.

0 If you use a NAS that does not conform with the DLNA standard, play the music via a PC. Set Windows

Media Player’s media sharing function and add NAS to the selected play folder.

0 If connection is restricted, set audio equipment as the connection target.

－
110
－

o Various online services cannot be played
Symptom
Various online services
cannot be played.

Front panel

Cause / Solution

Page

0 The online service may have been discontinued.

Display

Rear panel

295

－

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o The HDMI control function does not work
Symptom
The HDMI control function
does not work.

Cause / Solution

Page

0 Check that “HDMI Control” in the menu is set to “On”.

197

0 You cannot operate devices that are not compatible with the HDMI control function. In addition,

156

0 Check that the HDMI control function setting is enabled on all devices connected to this unit.

156

0 When you make connection related changes such as connecting an additional HDMI device, the link

156

depending on the connected device or the settings, the HDMI control function may not work. In this case,
operate the external device directly.

operation settings may be initialized. Turn off this unit and devices connected via HDMI, and turn them on
again.

0 The HDMI MONITOR 2 connector is not compatible with the HDMI control function. Use the HDMI

MONITOR 1 connector to connect to the TV.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

296

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network
Symptom
Cannot connect to the
network.

Cause / Solution

Page

0 The network name (SSID), password and encryption setting have not been set up correctly. Configure the

249

0 Shorten the distance from the wireless LAN access point and remove any obstructions to improve access

－

network settings according to the setting details of this unit.

first before re-connecting again. Place the unit away from microwave ovens and other network access
points.

Cannot connect to WPS.

0 Configure the access point channel settings away from channels that are being used by other networks.

－

0 This unit is not compatible with WEP (TSN).

－

0 Check that the WPS mode of the router is operating.

－

0 Press the WPS button on the router and then press the “Connect” button displayed on the TV within 2

－

0 A router/settings that are compatible with WPS 2.0 standards are required. Set the encryption time to

249

minutes.

“None”, “WPA-PSK (AES)” or WPA2-PSK (AES).

0 If the router encryption method is WEP/WPA-TKIP/WPA2-TKIP, you cannot connect by using the WPS

button. In this case, use the “Scan Networks” or “Manual” method to connect.

Cannot connect to the
network using iPhone/iPod
touch/iPad.

Front panel

－

0 Update the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad firmware to the latest version.

－

0 When using a USB cable to configure the settings, the iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS

－

5 or later. When configuring the settings via a wireless connection, iOS 7 or later needs to be supported.

Display

Rear panel

297

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly
Symptom
When using MAIN ZONE,
video output is interrupted
in HDMI ZONE2.

Cause / Solution

Page

0 With the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, when you operate MAIN ZONE, video

－

may be interrupted in HDMI ZONE2.

When using HDMI ZONE2, 0 Check that the power is on for ZONE2.
no video or audio is output 0 Check the input source for ZONE2.
from the TV in ZONE2.
0 The AUX1-HDMI connector on the front panel does not support the HDMI ZONE2 function.
0 In ZONE2, playback is only possible when the input signals are HDMI signals.

on the playback device. Alternatively, set “ZONE2 Setup” - “HDMI Audio” in the menu to “PCM”.

0 When the TV is not compatible with the resolution of the input video, no video is output. Set the output

resolution on the playback device to a resolution that is compatible with the TV.

When using HDMI ZONE2, 0 When the same input source is selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, the audio format is limited
MAIN ZONE audio is
according to the specifications of the TV in ZONE2.
played back as PCM.

Display

Rear panel

298

Remote

173
－
－

0 When the TV does not support the input audio format, audio is not output. Set the audio format to “PCM”

Front panel

173

Index

256
－
－

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Resetting factory settings
Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations cannot be performed.
Various settings are reset to the factory default values. Make settings again.

1
2

GAME

Display

Press X while simultaneously pressing GAME and ADSX.
Remove your fingers from the two buttons when
“Initialized” appears on the display.

0 Before restoring the default setting, the “Save” function of the web control function
can be used to store the various settings of the unit. (v p. 163)
However, account information for network content and information on registered
favorites cannot be stored.
0 When deleting a Pandora account, carry out steps 1 to 3 after signing out in the
Pandora service. (v p. 123)

A-DSX

Front panel

Turn off the power using X.

Rear panel

299

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

About HDMI
HDMI is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia Interface, which is
an AV digital interface that can be connected to a TV or amplifier.
With the HDMI connection, high definition video and high quality audio
formats adopted by Blu-ray Disc players (Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio) can be transmitted, which is not
possible with the analog video transmission.
Furthermore, in the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be
transmitted through a single HDMI cable, while in conventional
connections it is necessary to provide audio and video cables separately
for connection between devices. This allows you to simplify the wiring
configuration that tends to be quite complex in a home theater system.
This unit supports the following HDMI functions.

0 3D

This unit supports input and output of 3D (3 dimensional) video signals
of HDMI. To play back 3D video, you need a TV and player that
provide support for the HDMI 3D function and a pair of 3D glasses.

0 4K

This unit supports input and output of 4K (3840 x 2160 pixels) video
signals of HDMI.

0 Content Type

It automatically makes settings suitable for the video output type
(content information).

0 Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color

0 Deep Color

The color space defined by Adobe Systems Inc. Because it is a wider
color space than RGB, it can produce more vivid and natural images.

An imaging technology supported by HDMI. Unlike RGB or YCbCr,
which uses 8 bits (256 shades) per color, it can use 10 bits (1024
shades), 12 bits (4096 shades), or 16 bits (65536 shades) to produce
colors in higher definition.
Both devices linked via HDMI must support Deep Color.

0 sYCC601 color

Each of these color spaces defines a palette of available colors that is
larger than the traditional RGB color model.

0 “x.v.Color”

This function lets HDTVs display colors more accurately. It enables
display with natural, vivid colors.
“x.v.Color” is trademark of Sony Corporation.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

300

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

0 Auto Lip Sync

0 ARC (Audio Return Channel)

This function can automatically correct delay between the audio and
video.
Use a TV that is compatible with the Auto Lip Sync function.
Even when the power to this unit is set to standby, signals input from
the HDMI input connector are output to a TV or other device that is
connected to the HDMI output connector.

0 HDMI Control

If you connect the unit and an HDMI control function compatible TV or
player with an HDMI cable and then enable the HDMI control function
setting on each device, the devices will be able to control each other.
0 Power off link
This unit power off can be linked to the TV power off step.
0 Audio output destination switching
From the TV, you can switch whether to output audio from the TV or
the AV amplifier.
0 Volume adjustment
You can adjust this unit’s volume in the TV volume adjustment
operation.
0 Input source switching
You can switch this unit input sources through linkage to TV input
switching.
When playing the player, this unit input source switches to the
source for that player.

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

This function transmits audio signals from the TV to this unit through
the HDMI cable and plays back the audio from the TV on this unit
based on the HDMI control function.
If a TV without the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections,
video signals of the playback device connected to this unit are
transmitted to the TV, but this unit can not play back the audio from the
TV. If you want to enjoy surround audio for TV program, a separate
audio cable connection is required.
In contrast, if a TV with the ARC function is connected via HDMI
connections, no audio cable connection is required. Audio signals from
the TV can be input to this unit through the HDMI cable between this
unit and the TV. This function allows you to enjoy surround playback
on this unit for the TV.

0 HDMI Pass Through

Front panel

Tips

301

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Supported audio formats

Tips

Appendix

2-channel Linear
PCM

2-channel, 32 kHz – 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

Multi-channel
Linear PCM

7.1-channel, 32 kHz – 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

Bitstream

Dolby Digital / DTS / Dolby Atmos / Dolby TrueHD /
Dolby Digital Plus / DTS-HD Master Audio / DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio / DTS Express

DSD

2-channel – 5.1-channel, 2.8224 MHz

In order to play back digital video and audio such as BD video or DVD
video via HDMI connection, both this unit and the TV or player must to
support the copyright protection system known as HDCP (Highbandwidth Digital Content Protection System). HDCP is copyright
protection technology comprised of data encryption and authentication of
the connected AV devices. This unit supports HDCP.
0 If a device that does not support HDCP is connected, video and audio
are not output correctly. Read the owner’s manual of your television or
player for more information.

o Supported video signals
When connecting this unit to a device that is compatible with the Deep Color, 4K and
ARC functions, use a “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet” that bears the HDMI
logo.

0 480i

0 480p

0 576i

0 576p

0 720p 60/50Hz

0 1080i 60/50Hz

0 1080p 60/50/24Hz

0 4K 60/50/30/25/24 Hz

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

302

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Video conversion function
This unit automatically converts the input video signals as shown in the diagram before outputting them to the TV.
This unit

Video device

Input (IN)

Output

HDMI-compatible TV

Output
(MONITOR OUT)

HDMI signal

HDMI signal
HDMI connector

HDMI connector

HDMI-incompatible TV

Component video
signal

Component video
signal
Component video
connectors

Video connector

Front panel

Video signal

Component video
connectors

Video connector

Display

Component video
connectors

Video signal

Component video
connectors

Video connector

Rear panel

303

The main zone video conversion
function is compatible with the following
formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM,
NTSC4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and PAL-60.

Video connector

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

This unit can convert the input video signals to the resolution that is set for “Resolution” in the menu before outputting them to the TV. (v p. 201)
Input signal

HDMI

Component Video

Video

Output signal

480i/576i

480p/576p

720p

1080i

480i/576i
480p/576p
720p
1080i
1080p 24Hz
1080p
4K 30/25/24Hz
4K 60/50Hz

P
P

P
P
P
P

480i/576i
480p/576p
720p
1080i
1080p
480i/576i

P
P

P
P
P
P

Rear panel

304

HDMI
1080p
1080p 24Hz
P
P
P
P
P
P

4K 30/25/24Hz

4K 60/50Hz

P
P
P
P
P
P
P

P
P
P
P
P
P

Pz
P
P
P
P
P
P

P
P
P
P
P
P

z The HDMI connector on the front panel is not compatible.

Front panel

Display

Remote

Index

P
P
P
P
P
P

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back a USB memory devices
0 This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.

0 This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
0 This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.

0 If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/WAV/FLAC) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not be played

back properly.

o Compatible formats
Sampling frequency
WMAz1

32/44.1/48 kHz

MP3

32/44.1/ 48 kHz

WAV

32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz

Bit rate
48 – 192
kbps
32 – 320
kbps

Extension

.mp3

–

.wav

32/44.1/48 kHz

16 – 320
kbps

32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz
32/44.1/48/88.2/
96 kHz

.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4

–

.flac

–

.m4a

DSD

2.8 MHz

–

AIFF

32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz

–

.dsf/
.dff
.aif/
.aiff

MPEG-4 AACz1
FLAC
ALACz2

Front panel

Display

z1 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected.
Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer
may be copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings.

.wma

Rear panel

z2 Copyright [2012] [D&M Holdings. Inc.]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not
use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of
the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0

In ZONE2, it is not possible to play the DSD signal.

305

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Maximum number of playable files and folder

Item
Memory capacity

USB memory device
8 levels

Number of folders

500

filesz2

5000

Number of

This unit supports the following Bluetooth profile.
0 A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile):
When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected,
monaural and stereo sound data can be streamed at a high quality.
0 AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile):
When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected, the
Bluetooth device can be operated from this unit.

FAT16 : 2 GB, FAT32 : 2 TB

Number of folder directory levels z1

o About Bluetooth communications

z1 The limited number includes the root folder.
z2 The allowable number of files may differ according to the USB memory device
capacity and the file size.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

Playing back a Bluetooth device

The limits on the number of folders and files that can be displayed by
this unit are as follows.
Media

Tips

Radio waves broadcast from this unit may interfere with the operation
of medical devices. Make sure you turn off the power of this unit and
Bluetooth device in the following locations as radio wave interference
may cause malfunctions.
0 Hospitals, trains, aircraft, petrol kiosks and places where flammable
gases are generated
0 Near automatic doors and fire alarms

306

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS
0 This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.

0 This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
0 This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.

0 If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/WAV/FLAC) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not be played

back properly.

0 A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network.

o Specifications of supported files
Sampling frequency

Bit rate
48 – 192
kbps
32 – 320
kbps

Extension

–

.wav

32/44.1/48 kHz

16 – 320
kbps

32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz
32/44.1/48/88.2/
96 kHz

.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4

–

.flac

–

.m4a

DSD

2.8 MHz

–

AIFF

32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz

–

.dsf/
.dff
.aif/
.aiff

WMAz1

32/44.1/48 kHz

MP3

32/44.1/ 48 kHz

WAV

32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz

MPEG-4 AACz1
FLAC
ALACz2

Front panel

Display

.wma
.mp3

Rear panel

In ZONE2, it is not possible to play the DSD signal.

307

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back Internet Radio

Personal memory plus function

o Playable broadcast station specifications

The most recently used settings (input mode, HDMI output mode, sound
mode, tone control, channel level, MultEQ® XT32, Dynamic EQ, Dynamic
Volume, M-DAX and audio delay, etc.) are saved for each input source.

WMA

Sampling frequency
32/44.1/48 kHz

MP3

32/44.1/ 48 kHz

Bit rate
48 – 192
kbps
32 – 320
kbps

MPEG-4 AAC

32/44.1/48 kHz

16 – 320
kbps

Front panel

Display

Extension
.wma

“Surround Parameter” settings are stored for each sound mode.

.mp3

Last function memory

.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4

Rear panel

This function stores the settings which were made before going into the
standby mode.

308

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Sound modes and channel output

S This indicates the audio output channels or surround parameters that can be set.
D This indicates the audio output channels. The output channels depend on the settings of “Speaker Config.” (v p. 236).

Channel output
Sound mode

Front L/R

Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel)

Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel)

DSD Direct (2-channel)

Center

Surround
L/R

Surround
back L/R

Dz3

Front wide
Front
L/R
height L/R

Top Front
Top
Top Rear
L/R
Middle L/R
L/R

Rear
Height L/R

Front
Dolby
Enabled
L/R

Surround
Dolby
Enabled
L/R

Back
Dolby
Enabled
L/R

Subwoofer

Dz7
Dz3

Dz3

Dz7

DSD Direct (Multi-channel)

Stereo

Multi Ch In

Dz3

Dolby Surround z1

Dz4
Dz5

DTS Neo:X z2

Audyssey DSX®

D
D

D z5

Dz5

Dz6

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital Plus

Dz3

Dolby TrueHD

Dz3

Dolby Atmos

D
D
D

DTS Surround

DTS 96/24

DTS-HD

Dz3

DTS Express

Multi Ch Stereo

D z5

Virtual

Front panel

Display

Dz3

D
Dz5

D z5

Dz5

D z5

Dz5

D
D

Rear panel

309

Remote

Index

Contents
z1
z2
z3
z4
z5
z6
z7

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

The applicable sound mode includes “Dolby Surround” and sound modes that have “+Dolby Surround” in the sound mode name.
The applicable sound mode includes “DTS Neo:X” and sound modes that have “+Neo:X” in the sound mode name.
A signal for each channel contained in an input signal is output as audio.
Audio is not output when “Speaker Config.” - “Surr. Back” in the menu is set to “1 spkr”. (v p. 237)
Audio is output from the speakers specified in the “Surround Parameter” – “Speaker Select” settings. (v p. 184)
Audio is output from the speakers specified in the “Audyssey DSX®” settings. (v p. 190)
Audio is output when “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”. (v p. 243)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

310

Remote

Index

Appendix

Connections

Contents

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Sound modes and surround parameters
Surround Parameter
Dialog
Level
Adjust

Sound mode

Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel) z4
Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel)

Loudness
Management
z1

Dynamic
Compression
z2

Sz5

Subwoofer
Level
Adjust

Cinema EQ

Low
Frequency
Effects z3

DSD Direct (Multi-channel) z4

S
S

Stereo
Multi Ch In

Dolby Surround

DTS Neo:X

Audyssey DSX®

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby Atmos

DTS Surround

DTS 96/24

DTS-HD

DTS Express

Multi Ch Stereo

Virtual

- z5 : “Sound modes and surround parameters” (v p. 313)

Front panel

Center Gain

Sz5

DSD Direct (2-channel)

Speaker
Select

Display

Rear panel

311

Remote

Index

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Contents

Surround Parameter
Dialog
Enhancer

Tone
z6

MultEQ ® XT32
z7

Dynamic EQ
z8

Stereo

Multi Ch In

Dolby Surround

DTS Neo:X

Audyssey DSX®

Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus

Dynamic
Volume
z8

Audyssey
LFC TM
z8

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby Atmos

DTS Surround

DTS 96/24

DTS-HD

DTS Express

Multi Ch Stereo

Sound mode

Audyssey
DSX®

M-DAX
z9

Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel) z4
Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel) z4
DSD Direct (2-channel)
DSD Direct (Multi-channel) z4

Virtual
z4, z6

: “Sound modes and surround parameters” (v p. 313)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

312

Remote

Index

S
S
S
S

Contents
z1
z2
z3
z4
z5
z6
z7

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

This item can be selected when the Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos signal is played back.
This item can be selected when the Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos or DTS is played back.
This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal or DVD-Audio is played.
During playback in Pure Direct mode, the surround parameters are the same as in Direct mode.
This setting is available when “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”. (v p. 243)
This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” is set to “On”. (v p. 188)
This item cannot be set when Audyssey® Setup (Speaker Calibration) has not been performed.

z8 This item cannot be set when “MultEQ® XT32” in the menu is set to “Off”. (v p. 187)
z9 This item can be set when the input signal is analog, PCM 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

313

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes
.

F This indicates the default sound mode.
S This indicates the selectable sound mode.
2-channel signal
Sound mode

NOTE

Analog /
PCM

Dolby
Digital
(+/HD)

DTS
(-HD)

Multi-channel signal
DSD
(Super
Audio
CD)

PCM
Multi

DTS-HD

DTS
Express

DTS ES
Dscrt6.1

DTS ES
Mtrx6.1

DTS

Dolby
Atmos

Dolby
TrueHD

Dolby
Digital
Plus

Dolby
Digital
(EX)

DTS Surround
DTS-HD MSTR

Fz3

DTS-HD HI RES

Fz4

DTS ES Dscrt6.1

DTS ES Mtrx6.1

F
F
S

DTS Surround

DTS 96/24
S

DTS(-HD) + Dolby Surround

DTS Express
DTS(-HD) + Neo:X

F
Fz 5

DTS Neo:X

Dolby Surround
F

Dolby Atmos
Dolby TrueHD

Sz6

Dolby Digital+

Sz7

Dolby(D+)(HD) + Dolby Surround

S
S
F

Dolby(D)(D+)(HD) + Neo:X

Sz8
S

Dolby Surround
z1

- z8: “Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes” (v p. 316)

Front panel

F
S

Dolby Digital

Display

Rear panel

314

Remote

Index

DSD
(Super
Audio
CD)

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Contents

2-channel signal
Sound mode

NOTE

Analog /
PCM

Dolby
Digital
(+/HD)

DTS
(-HD)

Multi-channel signal
DSD
(Super
Audio
CD)

PCM
Multi

DTS-HD

DTS
Express

DTS ES
Dscrt6.1

DTS ES
Mtrx6.1

DTS

Dolby
Atmos

Dolby
TrueHD

Dolby
Digital
Plus

Dolby
Digital
(EX)

DSD
(Super
Audio
CD)

Multi Ch In
Multi Ch In

Multi Ch In + Dolby Surround

S
S

Multi Ch In + Neo:X

Multi Ch In 7.1

Fz10

Audyssey
Audyssey DSX®

Sz8

Direct
Direct

Sz9

S
S

DSD Direct

Pure Direct
S

Pure Direct

DSD Pure Direct

Original sound mode
Multi Ch Stereo

Rock Arena

Sz8

Jazz Club

Sz8

Mono Movie

Sz8

Video Game

Sz8

Matrix

Sz8

Virtual

Sz8

Stereo
Stereo
z1

- z2, z8 - z10 : “Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes” (v p. 316)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

315

Remote

Index

Contents
z1
z2
z3
z4
z5
z6
z7
z8
z9
z10

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

This item can be selected when surround back speakers are used.
The “Cinema” mode, “Music” mode or “Game” mode can be selected. This item can be selected when using any of the surround back, front height or front wide speaker.
This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS-HD Master Audio.
This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS-HD Hi Resolution.
This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS 96/24.
This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby TrueHD signal.
This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby Digital Plus signal.
This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus signal.
The default sound mode for the AirPlay playback is “Direct”.
This item can be selected when the input signals contain surround back signals.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

316

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Explanation of terms
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion (A-DSX)

o Audyssey

Audyssey DSX® is a new surround enhancement technology that raises
the surround effect and impression to realize a larger surround space by
adding a new channel to the existing 5.1 channel system.
In research on human hearing characteristics, two points can be broadly
cited as elements that enhance the surround effect. The most important
point is the creation of horizontal spread (wide channel) at the front
(forward) area in composing a realistic surround space. The next
important point is the creation of vertical spread (height channel) in the
front (forward) area using recognizable (audible) acoustic signals so as to
create a surround space with depth.

Audyssey Dynamic EQ®
Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume
is decreased by taking into account human perception and room
acoustics.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ® XT32
to provide well-balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.

Audyssey DSX® then creates a pair of Height channels to reproduce the
next most important acoustical and perceptual cues. In addition, Audyssey
DSX® does not simply add a channel but combines the existing front,
surround and rear surround sound to develop a technology known as
“Surround Envelopment Processing” which has been incorporated into
Audyssey DSX® to further enhance the effect.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

317

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level
between television programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud
passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is integrated into Dynamic
Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the
perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog
clarity remain the same.

Dolby Atmos
Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of
dimension and immersion to the Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos
is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio
as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and
move dynamically throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during
playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height
plane of sound above the listener.

Audyssey LFC™ (Low Frequency Containment)
Audyssey LFC™ solves the problem of low frequency sounds disturbing
people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey LFC™ dynamically
monitors the audio content and removes the low frequencies that pass
through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies psychoacoustic
processing to restore the perception of low bass for listeners in the room.
The result is great sound that no longer disturbs the neighbors.

Dolby Atmos Stream
Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV
receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc,
downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains
special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room.
This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and
scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of
every size and configuration.

Audyssey MultEQ® XT32
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 is a room equalization solution that calibrates
any audio system so that it can achieve optimum performance for every
listener in a large listening area. Based on several room measurements,
MultEQ® XT32 calculates an equalization solution that corrects for both
time and frequency response problems in the listening area and also
performs a fully automated surround system setup.

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

o Dolby

Audyssey Dynamic Volume®

Front panel

Tips

318

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Dolby Digital

Dolby Surround

Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Dolby
Laboratories.
A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels (“FL”, “FR” and “C”), 2
surround channels (“SL” and “SR”) and the “LFE” channel for low
frequency effects.
Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic
sound field with a “three-dimensional” feeling (sense of distance,
movement and positioning) is achieved. This delivers a thrilling surround
sound experience in the home.

Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently
up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for playback through your surround
speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker
layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ inceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker technology.
Dolby Speaker Technology (Dolby Enabled Speakers)
A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing
Dolby speaker technology employ the ceiling above you as a reflective
surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. Dolby
enabled speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal
processing that can be built into a conventional speaker, or a standalone
speaker module, minimally impacting the overall speaker system footprint
while providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and
Dolby surround playback.

Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is
compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also
improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It is
upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it offers greater
flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the
playback device.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

319

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o DTS

Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby
Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the
sound of the studio master.
This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels
with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit resolution.

DTS
This is an abbreviation of Digital Theater System, which is a digital audio
system developed by DTS. DTS delivers a powerful and dynamic
surround sound experience, and is found in the world’s finest movie
theaters and screening rooms.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in
5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization
on DVD-Video.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS™ Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS,
Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to
5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

320

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format
adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound.
Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible
according to the decoder.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional
DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with sampling
frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital
sound. High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound. This
format is fully compatible with conventional products, including
conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.

DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel audio format that inserts a surround
back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix
encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also
possible according to the decoder.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit rates (max. 5.1channels, 24 to 256 kbps).

DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio format created by Digital
Theater System (DTS). This format provides the facility to support up to 8
audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and
up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit
resolution. It is fully compatible with conventional products, including
conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.

DTS-HD

DTS Neo:X

DTS Express

This audio technology provides higher sound quality and enhanced
functionality than the conventional DTS and is adopted as an optional
audio for Blu-ray Disc.
This technology supports multi-channel, high data transfer speed, high
sampling frequency, and lossless audio playback. Maximum 7.1-channels
are supported in Blu-ray Disc.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

This matrix decoding technology uses the DTS Neo:X decoder to
playback 2-channel source or 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround sources as a
maximum of 11.1-channel surround sound. There are 3 modes: “Music”
suited for playing music, “Cinema” suited for playing movies, and “Game”
which is optimized for playing games.

321

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Audio
This is a codec for lossless audio compression method developed by
Apple Inc. This codec can be played back on iTunes, iPod or iPhone. Data
compressed to approximately 60 – 70 % can be decompressed to exactly
the same original data.
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
FLAC stands for Free lossless Audio Codec, and is a lossless free audio
file format. Lossless means that the audio is compressed without any loss
in quality.
The FLAC license is as shown below.
Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008,
2009 Josh Coalson
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
0 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
0 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
0 Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec)

Front panel

Tips

LFE
This is an abbreviation of Low Frequency Effect, which is an output
channel that emphasizes low frequency effect sound. Surround audio is
intensified by outputting 20 Hz to 120 Hz deep bass to the system
subwoofer(s).
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3)
This is an internationally standardized audio data compression scheme,
using the “MPEG-1” video compression standard. It compresses the data
volume to about one eleventh its original size while maintaining sound
quality equivalent to a music CD.

322

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group), MPEG-2, MPEG-4

Sampling frequency

These are the names for digital compression format standards used for
the encoding of video and audio. Video standards include “MPEG-1
Video”, “MPEG-2 Video”, “MPEG-4 Visual”, “MPEG-4 AVC”. Audio
standards include “MPEG-1 Audio”, “MPEG-2 Audio”, “MPEG-4 AAC”.

Sampling involves taking a reading of a sound wave (analog signal) at
regular intervals and expressing the height of the wave at each reading in
digitized format (producing a digital signal).
The number of readings taken in one second is called the “sampling
frequency”. The larger the value, the closer the reproduced sound is to the
original.

WMA (Windows Media Audio)
This is audio compression technology developed by Microsoft
Corporation.

Speaker impedance
This is an AC resistance value, indicated in Ω (Ohms).
Greater power can be obtained when this value is smaller.

Media®

WMA data can be encoded using Windows
Player.
To encode WMA files, only use applications authorized by Microsoft
Corporation. If you use an unauthorized application, the file may not work
properly.

Dialog normalization function
This function operates automatically during playback of Dolby Digital,
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS or DTS-HD sources.
It automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program
sources.
Dynamic range
The difference between the maximum undistorted sound level and the
minimum discernible level above the noise emitted by the device.
Downmix
This function converts the number of channels of surround audio to a
lower number of channels and plays back according to the system’s
configuration.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

323

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Video

o Network

ISF

AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)

ISF (Imaging Science Foundation) is an organization that certifies video
technicians who are then qualified to carry out calibration and adjustment
to match the installation conditions. It also sets quality standards for the
optimization of device video performance.

This is a next generation standard encryption method replacing the current
DES and 3DES, and because of its high security it is expected to be
applied widely to wireless LANs in the future. It uses the “Rijndael”
algorithm developed by two Belgian cryptographers to divide the data into
blocks of fixed lengths and encrypt each block. It supports data lengths of
128, 192 and 256 bits and key lengths of 128, 192 and 256 bits as well,
offering extremely high encryption security.

Progressive (sequential scanning)
This is a scanning system of the video signal that displays 1 frame of video
as one image. Compared to the interlace system, this system provides
images with less flickering and jagged edges.

AirPlay
AirPlay sends (plays) contents recorded in iTunes or on an iPhone/iPod
touch/iPad to a compatible device via the network.
DLNA
DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks of
Digital Living Network Alliance. Some contents may not be compatible
with other DLNA CERTIFIED® products.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

324

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol)

Wi-Fi®

This is a network key used for WPA. The encryption algorithm is RC4, the
same as for WEP, but the security level is increased by changing the
network key used for encryption for each packet.

Wi-Fi Certification assures tested and proven interoperability by the Wi-Fi
Alliance, a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN devices.
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)

vTuner

This is a security standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance. In addition to
the conventional SSID (network name) and WEP key (network key), it also
uses a user identification function and encrypting protocol for stronger
security.

This is a free online content server for Internet Radio.
For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site below.
vTuner website:
http://www.radiomarantz.com
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Nothing
Else Matters Software and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such
technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from
Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.

WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2)
This is a new version of the WPA established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
compatible with more secure AES encryption.
WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared Key)
This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when a
preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point and
client.

WEP Key (network key)
This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting data
transfer. On this unit, the same WEP key is used for data encryption and
decryption, so the same WEP key must be set on both devices in order for
communications to be established between them.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
This is a standard drawn up by the Wi-Fi Alliance to ease the task of
setting up wireless LAN connections and configuring security. There are
two methods: push-button and PIN (Personal Identification Number) code.

325

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

When forming wireless LAN networks, groups are formed to prevent
interference, data theft, etc. These groups are based on “SSID (network
names)”. For enhanced security, a WEP key is set so that communication
is unavailable unless both the “SSID” and the WEP key match. This is
suitable for temporarily constructing a simplified network.

iTunes
iTunes is the name of the multimedia player provided by Apple Inc.
iTunes is the name of the multimedia player provided by Apple Inc. It
enables management and playback of multimedia contents including
music and movies. iTunes supports many main file formats including AAC,
WAV, and MP3.

Modem
Device that connects to your broadband internet provider, and is very
often supplied with the service. A type that is integrated with a router is
also often available.

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

o Media player

Network Names (SSID: Security Set Identifier)

Front panel

Tips

Windows Media Player
This is a media player distributed free of charge by Microsoft Corporation.
It can play playlists created with Ver.11 or later of Windows Media Player,
as well as WMA, WAV, and other files.

326

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Others

Tips

Pairing
Pairing (registration) is an operation that is required in order to connect a
Bluetooth device to this unit using Bluetooth. When paired, the devices
authenticate each other and can connect without mistaken connections
occurring.
When using Bluetooth connection for the first time, you need to pair this
unit and the Bluetooth device to be connected.
This unit can store pairing information for a maximum of 8 devices.

App Store
App Store is a site that sells application software for such devices as the
iPhone or iPod Touch, and is operated by Apple Inc.
HDCP
When transmitting digital signals between devices, this copyright
protection technology encrypts the signals to prevent content from being
copied without authorization.

Protection circuit
This is a function to prevent damage to devices within the power supply
when an abnormality such as an overload, excess voltage occurs or over
temperature for any reason.
If a malfunction occurs in this unit, the power indicator blinks red and the
unit switches to standby mode.

MAIN ZONE
The room where this unit is placed is called the MAIN ZONE.
ZONE2
This unit can operate in a room other than the room where this unit is
placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE2 playback). The room for ZONE2 playback
is called ZONE2.
ZONE3
This unit can operate in a room other than the room where this unit is
placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE3 playback). The room for ZONE3 playback
is called ZONE3.

Front panel

Appendix

Display

Rear panel

327

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Trademark information

.
.

Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories™. U.S. and
foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic
EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume®, Audyssey DSX® and Audyssey
LFC™ are registered trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories.

“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory
has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone,
respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this
accessory with iPod, or iPhone, may affect wireless performance.
AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,
iPod shuffle and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
0 Individual users are permitted to use iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod
nano, iPod shuffle, and iPod touch for private copy and playback of
non-copyrighted contents and contents whose copy and playback is
permitted by law. Copyright infringement is prohibited by law.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by D&M Holdings Inc.
is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their
respective owners.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby
Atmos, Dolby Surround, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

328

Remote

Index

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Contents

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license
from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the
Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS-HD Master Audio
and DTS Neo:X | 11.1 are a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.

The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
Wi-Fi Certification provides assurance that the device has passed the
interoperability test conducted by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a group that certifies
interoperability among wireless LAN devices.

The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the
HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing
LLC in the United States and other countries.

Adobe, the Adobe logo and Reader are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or
other countries.

This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation.
Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

329

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Specifications
o Audio section
0 Power amplifier

Rated output:

Front:
125 W + 125 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
165 W + 165 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Center:
125 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05% T.H.D.)
165 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Surround:
125 W + 125 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
165 W + 165 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Surround back / Height1 / Front wide/Height2:
125 W + 125 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
165 W + 165 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)

Output connectors:

Front panel

4 – 16 Ω/ohms

Display

Rear panel

330

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

0 Analog

Input sensitivity/Input impedance:

200 mV/47 kΩ/kohms

Frequency response:

10 Hz – 100 kHz — +1, –3 dB (Direct mode)

S/N:

100 dB (IHF–A weighted, Direct mode)

Distortion:

0.005 % (20 Hz – 20 kHz) (Direct mode)

Rated output:

1.2 V

0 Digital

D/A output:

Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)
Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB)
S/N ratio — 102 dB
Dynamic range — 100 dB

Digital input:

Format — Digital audio interface

0 Phono equalizer

Input sensitivity:

2.5 mV

RIAA deviation:

±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

S/N:

74 dB (IHF-A)

Rated output:

150 mV

Distortion factor:

0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

331

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o Video section
0 Standard video connectors

Input/output level and impedance:

1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

Frequency response:

5 Hz – 10 MHz — 0, –3 dB

0 Color component video connector

Input/output level and impedance:

Y signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
PB / CB signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
PR / CR signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

Frequency response:

5 Hz – 60 MHz — 0, –3 dB

o Tuner section

[FM]

[AM]

(Note: μV at 75 Ω/ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10 –15 W)
Reception frequency range:

87.50 MHz – 107.90 MHz

530 kHz – 1710 kHz

Effective sensitivity:

1.5 μV (14.8 dBf)

20 μV

S/N ratio (IHF-A):

Mono: 78 dB
Stereo: 68 dB
HD: 85 dB

85 dB

Distortion (1 kHz):

MONO ― 0.1 %
STEREO ― 0.2 %
HD: 0.02 %

0.02 %

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

332

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o Wireless LAN section
Network type (wireless LAN standard):

Conforming to Wi-Fi®z1

Security:

WEP 64 bit, WEP 128 bit
WPA/WPA2-PSK (AES)
WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP)

Radio frequency:

2.4 GHz

No. of channels:

1 – 11 ch

z1 The Wi-Fi® CERTIFIED Logo and the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED On-Product Logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

333

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Bluetooth section
Communications system:

Bluetooth Version 2.1 + EDR (Enhanced Data Rate)

Transmission power:

Maximum 2.5 mW (Class 2)

Maximum communication range:

Approx. 32.8 ft/10 m in line of sightz2

Frequency band:

2.4 GHz band

Modulation scheme:

FHSS (Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum)

Supported profiles:

A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) 1.2
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) 1.4

Corresponding codec:

SBC, AAC

Transmission range (A2DP):

20 Hz - 20,000 Hz

z2 The actual communication range varies depending on the influence of such factors as obstructions between devices, electromagnetic waves from
microwave ovens, static electricity, cordless phones, reception sensitivity, antenna performance, operating system, application software etc.

o General
Power supply:

AC 120 V, 60 Hz

Power consumption:

710 W

Power consumption in standby mode:

0.2 W

Power consumption in CEC standby
mode:

0.5 W

Power consumption in network standby
mode:
2.7 W
For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

334

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

10 33/64 (267)
25/32
(20)

45/64
(18)

2 3/32
(53)

16 3/16 (411)

14 7/32 (361)

2 7/16
(62)

1 17/64
(32)

o Dimensions (Unit : in. (mm))

.
o Weight: 30 lbs 7oz (13.8 kg)
1 31/32 (50)

Front panel

Display

2 23/64
(60)
13 25/64 (340)

Rear panel

7 9/32 (185)

9 23/32 (247)

35/64
(14)

6 47/64 (171)

17 21/64 (440)

1 31/32 (50)

335

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Index

Playback

Settings

11.1-channel ............................................ 47, 56
3D ................................................................ 300
4K ................................................................ 300
5.1-channel .................................. 37, 44, 53, 54
7.1-channel .................................. 36, 45, 50, 51
9.1-channel .............................................. 46, 49
vA
Accessories ..................................................... 8
Add New Feature ......................................... 263
Adjusting the volume ...................................... 80
Adjusting volume of each channel ................ 137
AirPlay .......................................................... 127
All Zone Stereo ............................................ 141
Audio formats ....................... 302, 305, 307, 308
Audio settings ....................................... 175, 181
Audyssey DSX® .......................................... 317

Direct sound mode ....................................... 150
Display ........................................................... 20

vC
Cables ............................................................ 31
Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player ................... 65
Connecting a cable TV ................................... 64
Connecting a DVD player ............................... 65
Connecting a game console ........................... 66

DLNA ........................................................... 324
Dolby Atmos ................................................. 318
Dolby sound mode ............................... 146, 319
DTS sound mode ................................. 147, 320
vE

Connecting a satellite tuner ............................ 64

ECO Mode ................................................... 254

Connecting a set-top box ............................... 64

Error messages (Audyssey® Setup) ............ 218

Connecting a TV ................................. 60, 61, 62

Explanation of terms/technology .......... 300, 317

Connecting a video camera ........................... 66
Connecting an external control device ........... 75
Connecting an iPod ........................................ 69
Connecting an USB memory device .............. 69
Connecting HD Radio receiver ....................... 71
Connecting a power cord ............................... 77
Connecting to a home network (LAN) ............ 73
Connecting ZONE2/ZONE3 ................... 52, 168

Audyssey Dynamic EQ® ............................. 317

vF
Firmware Update .......................................... 262
Front panel ..................................................... 15
vG
General settings ................................... 177, 254
vH
HD Radio playback ........................................ 94

Audyssey Dynamic Volume® ...................... 318

HDCP ........................................................... 302

Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 ............................ 318

HDMI Control ....................................... 156, 197

Audyssey settings ................................ 187, 212
Audyssey® Setup ........................................ 210
Auto Standby ............................................... 255

Front panel

Display

Appendix

Bi-amp connection ......................................... 48

v Numerics

Tips

Rear panel

336

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Settings

Input Assign ................................................. 206
Input signal ................................................... 314
Input source settings ............................ 176, 206
Inputting characters ...................................... 179
Inserting the batteries ....................................... 9
iPod Browse Mode ......................................... 83
iTunes .......................................................... 326
vJ
JPEG ...................................................... 86, 109
vL
Listening position ......................................... 210
Listening to Spotify ....................................... 130
vM
M-DAX ......................................................... 185
Menu map .................................................... 175
vN
Network settings ................................... 247, 247

Front panel

Playback

Display

Tips

Appendix

Original sound mode .................................... 149

Random playback .................................. 85, 132
Rear panel ...................................................... 24

vP
Pairing a Bluetooth device ........................ 90, 93
PCM multi-channel sound mode .................. 148
Picture Mode ................................................ 140
Playing back a Bluetooth device .................... 91
Playing back a Blu-ray Disc player ................. 80

Remote control unit ........................................ 27
Remove from Favorites ................................ 134
Repeat playback .................................... 85, 132
Resetting factory settings ............................. 299
vS

Playing back a DVD player ............................. 80

Save to Favorites ......................................... 133

Playing back an iPod ...................................... 81

Selecting the input source .............................. 79

Playing back Flickr ....................................... 116

Setup Assistant ............................................ 177

Playing back from PC ................................... 109

Sleep timer ................................................... 157

Playing back Internet Radio ......................... 105

Slideshow .................................................... 135

Playing back NAS ........................................ 109

Slideshow Interval ........................................ 136

Playing back Pandora® ............................... 117

Smart select function .................................... 159

Playing back SiriusXM ................................. 124

Sound mode ................................. 143, 309, 311

Playing back USB memory device ................. 86

Speaker connection ....................................... 32

Playing back ZONE2/ZONE3 ....................... 168

Speaker Settings .................................. 176, 210

Preset codes ................................................ 339

Stereo sound mode ...................................... 150

Protection circuit .......................................... 327
PURE DIRECT ............................................. 144

Rear panel

337

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

vT
Text Search .................................................. 134
Tips .............................................................. 279
Tone Control ................................................ 138
Troubleshooting ........................................... 281
Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) ..... 80
Turning the power on ..................................... 79
vV
Video Conversion ................................. 200, 303
Video Select ................................................. 139
Video settings ....................................... 175, 193
vW
Web control .................................................. 162
Wi-Fi settings ............................................... 248

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

338

Remote

Index

Appendix

Connections

Contents

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

List of preset codes
To return a preset code to the default settings, register the AVR code “0000” to the button whose preset code you want to cancel.

AVR
Marantz

0000

CBL/SAT group
Registrable input source button :

Access Communications 4081
Adams Cable TV
4081
Alabama Broadband 4081
Alphastar
4027
Alta Utilities
4075
Americable International 4075
Amstrad
4076, 4046, 4047, 4050
Anne Arundel Broadband 4081
Apple TV
4068
Arledge Electronics 4074, 4081
Armstrong
4081
Astound Broadband 4075, 4081
ATMC
4081
Atsky
4048
Ballard Rural
4074
Telephone Cooperative
Bee Line Cable
4081

Front panel

Display

Bell
Bell Satellite TV
Bend Broadband

4074
4074
4081

Blue Ridge
Communications

4075

Cablevision du Nord 4081
Cablevision of
4081
Marion County

Boycom Cablevision 4081
Bright House
4075, 4081
Bristol Tennessee 4075
Essential Services
BSkyB

4076, 4021, 4045, 4046

Buckeye Cable System 4081
Cable America
4075
Cable Axion Digitel 4081
Cable Cable
4075
Cablecom
4080
Cable &
4081
Communications

Rear panel

339

Cable One
4081
Cable Suite
4081
Cable TV of Camrose 4081

Cable Vision Services 4075
Cablevision
4075, 4081
Canal+
4082
CanalSat
4082
CAS Cable
4081
CCAP
Chaparral
Chambers Cable
Charter
Chester Telephone

Remote

Index

4075
4039
4081
4075, 4081
4081

Connections

Contents

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

CBL/SAT group
Registrable input source button :
EastLink
Easton Cable

Cincinnati Bell
4075, 4081
Citizens Cable TV 4081
Cisco
4075, 4080
Coast Cable
4081
Communications
4081
Coast Communications
Cogeco
4081
Columbus Telephone
Comcast
Community Cable
& Broadband

4081
4075, 4081

Comporium
Consolidated
Communications

4075

Coop CSCF

Echostar
Eurosky

4081

FirstMile

4081

Humax

4075

4081
4081
4001, 4016, 4044
4074
4030
4074

Drake
4026
DRE
4051
East Arkansas Video 4081

J
K

4051

4056
Freesat
Fujitsu
4025
GCI
4081
GE
4002, 4008, 4009
General Instruments 4036, 4037
General Satellite
4051
Glenwood
4081
Telecommunications
Grande
4075, 4081
Communications

L
M

Gradiente
4044, 4057
Harlan Community TV 4081
Harlan Municipal
4081
Utilities
Hitachi
4001, 4015

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

340

Remote

4081
4081
4081
4074
4001, 4016
4078, 4079, 4049, 4050, 4051,
4052, 4053
4081

HunTel Systems
ImOn
4075
Communications
Inside Connect Cable 4081
Insight
4081
Inter Mountain Cable 4075
Janeil
4025
JVC
4074, 4017
Kabel Deutschland 4078
KBS Cable TV
4081
Knology
4075
LG Smart TV
4069
Liberty Cablevision 4081
Lincoln Cable
4081
Television
Loretel Systems
4081
Madison
4081
Communications
Marantz
4000
Markdale Cable TV 4081
MCV Broadband
4075
Mediacom
4081
Mediapolis
4081
Telephone
Mediastream
4081

Country Cablevision Ltd.4081
Cox
4075, 4081
CRRS-TV
Delta Cable
Direct Tv
Dish Mexico
Dish Network
Dishpro

4017

Foxtel

4081

Coosa Cable
4081
Country Cablevision 4081

Express Vu
Fayetteville
Electric System

Florida Cable
4081
Foothills Rural
4075
Telephone Cooperative

4081

HomeTel
Hood Canal
Cablevision
Horizon Cable TV
HTS
Hughes Network

4081
4075
4074, 4007, 4017, 4018, 4019,
4020, 4062, 4063, 4064
4056, 4047

Index

Connections

Contents

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

CBL/SAT group
Registrable input source button :
MetroCast
Cablevision
MetroNet
Midcontinent
Communications
Mid-Rivers
Communications

4081
4075
4081

4081

Minet

4001

Mitsubishi
Mosaic Telecom

3007
4081

Morristown Utility
Systems

4075

Motorola
MTC Technologies
Muscatine Power
& Water
Netgear Neo TV
Nextgen
Communications

Pace
Panasonic

4081
4081

4081
4072
4075, 4081

Nokia
4058, 4059, 4060, 4061
Northland
4081
Communications
Northwest Iowa
4075
Telephone
Northwest
4081
Telephone Cooperative
4081
4081
4075

4077
4048
4077

4081
4075, 4077, 4076, 4079, 4080, 4081,
4082
4004, 4010

Samsung

4041, 4043

Scientific Atlanta
Service Electric
Shaw
Shentel
Sjoberg's Cable TV
SKY
Sky Deutschland
Skyplus
Skysat
Source Cable

4075

Panhandle Telephone
Philips
Pine Bluff Cable
Pioneer
Proscan
PTCI

4081
4080, 4031,4035, 4044, 4057
4081
4075

Radio Shack
Rancho Murieta
Association

4036, 4037

Sony

4081

RCA
RCN
Realistic
Reservation
Telephone
Resort Cable
Rogers
Roku XDS
Rural Cable
Rural Telephone
Company

4002, 4008, 4009, 4029
4081
4040

Sun Country Cable
Star Choice
Star Trak
STS
Suddenlink
SuperDish
TDS Telecom
Teac
Teledistribution
Amos
Telus
Texas Mid-Gulf
Cablevision

4002, 4008, 4009, 4011
4081

4081

4081
4075, 4081
4073
4036
4081

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

341

Remote

4075, 4076, 4077, 4022, 4027, 4042,
4043, 4054, 4055, 4050

Schneider

NorthwesTel
Novus
NuLink

NTL
Optima
Optus
Orbitel
Communications

Index

4081
4081
4081
4081
4076, 4079, 4044, 4045, 4057
4079
4048
4041, 4047, 4056
4081
4003, 4012, 4014, 4065, 4066, 4067,
4014, 4070
4081
4032
4024
4038
4075, 4081
4028
4074
4049
4081
4074
4081

Connections

Contents

Playback

Settings

Tips

CBL/SAT group
Registrable input source button :
Thomson
4076, 4080, 4046, 4056
Time Warner
4075, 4081
Toshiba
4001, 4034
Total Cable Service 4081
Triangle
4074
Communication System
4051
Tricolor TV

UPC
UPC Cablecom
Valparaiso
Communications

4077, 4080

Videotron
Video Pall

4075
4025

Vision
Communications

4081

Virgin Media
Volcano Vision
VTR

4077
4081
4081

Wadsworth Cable TV
Waitsfield Cable
Wave Broadband
Westman
Communications
Western Digital
WD TV
Western Iowa
Telephone
White County Video

4081
4081
4081

WideOpenWest

4081

Willamette
Broadband
Windom
Communications

X
Z

4081
4071
4075
4081
4081
4075

WOW!
Xfinity

4075, 4081

Zenith

4033, 4025, 4023

4075, 4081

4080
4081

Tri-County Cable TV 4081
Troy Cablevision
4081
TV Cable Company
4081
of Andalusia
Universum
4075
Uniden
4005, 4006, 4013
United Communications
4081
Association
Utilities Board City
4081
of Foley

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

342

Remote

Index

Appendix

Connections

Contents

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Audio group
Registrable input source button :

3063
3106

Aiwa
Akai

3104, 3106, 3001, 3002, 3003
3004, 3005, 3006

Arcam
Atoll Electronique
Audio
Audio LABS

3106, 3107
3106
3007
3008

Audio Research
Audiolab
Audiomeca
Audioton
AVI
Cairn

3106
3106
3106
3106
3106
3106

California
Cambridge
Carver
Casio
Copland
Curtis
Cyrus

3008
3106
3106, 3009, 3010, 3011
3012, 3020
3109
3020, 3012
3106

Denon
DKK
Dual
Dynaco
Emerson
Fisher

3013, 3108
3097
3108
3106
3014
3011, 3015, 3016, 3017, 3018

H
I
J
K

Garrard
GE
Genexxa
Goldmund
Grundig
Harman/Kardon
Harmon
Hitachi

3109
3109
3063, 3014, 3021, 3020
3106
3106
3106
3022, 3023, 3051
3063, 3020

Inkel
Integra
JC Penney
JVC
Kardon

3024
3110
3012, 3020, 3025
3026, 3027

Kenwood

3022, 3051, 3023
3106, 3028, 3029, 3030, 3031,
3032, 3033

Krell
Linn
Loewe
Luxman
LX I
Magnavox
Marantz

3106, 3010
3106
3106
3109, 3035, 3036, 3037, 3038
3012, 3020, 3014
3106, 3010, 3039, 3040
3000, 3106, 3010, 3041, 3042, 3043

Mathes
Matsui

3012, 3020

MCS
Memorex
Meridian

3012, 3020
3063
3106

Rear panel

343

MGA
Micromega
Mission
Mitsubishi
Musical Fidelity
Myryad

3023
3106
3106, 3010
3023, 3044
3109
3106

NAD
Naim
Nakamichi
NEC MCS
Nikko
NSM

Onkyo

3097, 3034, 3045
3106
3046, 3047, 3048
3025
3007, 3016
3106
3110, 3049, 3050, 3051, 3052,
3055, 3102, 3103

Optimus

3106

Orion
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Primare
Proton
QED
Quad
Quasar
Radiola
RCA

E
F

Advantage
AH!

Front panel

Display

Remote

Index

3063 3097, 3011, 3014, 3020,3028,
3053, 3054, 3056, 3057,3058
3109
3008, 3060, 3061
3106, 3009, 3010, 3040
3110, 3020, 3021, 3062, 3063, 3064
3106
3106
3106
3106
3008
3106
3063, 3011, 3014, 3065, 3066, 3067,
3068, 3069

Connections

Contents

Playback

Settings

Tips

Audio group
Registrable input source button :

Realistic
Restek
Revox

3011 3014, 3020, 3042, 3054, 3057
3106
3106

Rotel

3106, 3010

RS Original
SAE
Samsung
Sansui

3070
3106, 3010, 3083
3071
3106, 3014, 3068, 3072, 3073

Sanyo
Scott
Sears
Sharp
Sherwood
Shure

3011, 3018,3074, 3075,3076
3014
3012, 3014, 3020, 3028,3042
3028, 3042, 3077
3042, 3056, 3070, 3078,3024
3025

Siemens
Simaudio
Sonic Frontiers

3106
3106
3106
3039, 3079, 3080,3081,3082, 3097,
3098, 3099, 3100, 3101
3010
3083

Sony

Sylvania
Symphonic
TAG McLaren
Tandy
Teac
Technica

3106
3106
3045

Universum
Victor
Wadia
Wards
Yamaha

Zenith

3106
3026
3106
3106,3063,3097
3105,3063,3007,3089,3090,3091,
3092
3016,3093,3094,3095,3096

U
V
W

3106
3063
3109, 3016, 3042, 3057, 3083, 3084,
3085, 3086
3007, 3008, 3061, 3087, 3088
3040

Theta Digital

Thorens
Thule Audio
Toshiba

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

344

Remote

Index

Appendix

Connections

Contents

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

TV group
Registrable input source button :

1141

Admiral
Aiko

1009, 1089, 1002
1059

Aiwa
Akai

1117, 1118
1161, 1164, 1172, 1001

Amtron
Anam
Anam National
AOC

1023
1113
1023, 1069, 1092
1003, 1049, 1024, 1127

Aristona
Audiovox
Baird
Barco
Basic Line
Bell & Howell

1172
1023
1161
1172
1172
1009, 1025

Benq
Berthen
Blue Sky
BPL
Broksonic
Bush
Celebrity

1104, 1142
1172
1172
1161
1097, 1098, 1113, 1003
1161, 1172
1001

Citizen
Colortyme
Contec/Cony
Craig
Crown

1003, 1023, 1059, 1063, 1026, 1013
1003, 1043
1045, 1047, 1023, 1113
1023, 1113, 1020, 1022
1161, 1023, 1067

Curtis Mathes

Daewoo
Dansai

1003, 1013, 1016

Direct TV
Dumont
D-Vision

1152
1010, 1003, 1153
1172
1172

Gateway
GE

1003, 1059, 1024, 1084, 1101, 1013,
1035, 1036, 1172
1161

Daytron
De Graaf
Dimensia

Goldstar

Fisher
Firstline

1161, 1051, 1025, 1091, 1160
1161, 1172

JC Penney

Freesat
Fujitsu
Funai

1165
1038, 1155, 1124, 1125
1038, 1023, 1113

Jensen
JMB

1172

Elbe
Electroband
Electrohome

Envision
ESA
Finlandia
Finlux

1161
1110, 1103

1001
1003, 1133, 1001, 1069
1003, 1020, 1044, 1038, 1045, 1048,
1055, 1023, 1025, 1061, 1022, 1094,
1096, 1099, 1013, 1113, 1101, 1015,
1021
1003
1164
1161
1172

Goodmans
Granada
Grandin
Grundig
Hallmark
Hanseatic
Hisense

Front panel

Display

1150
1110, 1003, 1085, 1046, 1054, 1133,
1018, 1069, 1022, 1103, 1113, 1136,
1153
1045, 1024, 1112, 1080, 1100, 1013,
1003, 1030, 1154
1172
1161
1172
1172
1003
1172
1172, 1161, 1116
1041, 1003, 1045, 1047, 1032, 1065,
1068, 1088, 1082, 1037, 1094, 1031,
1159, 1145, 1139, 1012, 1140
1172
1067
1172
1161
1161
1134
1067
1003, 1046, 1047, 1054, 1133, 1110,
1019, 1112, 1024, 1063, 1018, 1026,
1083, 1085, 1100, 1103,1013,1154
1003

Emerson

1003, 1110, 1025, 1062, 1026, 1103,
1013

Hitachi

Hypson
Infinity
Internal
ITT
ITT Nokia
Janeil
JBL

Acer

Rear panel

345

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

TV group
Registrable input source button :
Jubilee
JVC

L
M

Kathrein
Kawasho
Kenwood
Kloss Novabeam
Kneissel

1172
1003, 1001
1003
1056, 1023, 1057, 1134
1172

KTV

1023, 1073, 1099, 1013,1113,1033,
1034

LG
Luxor
M.Wards
Magnavox
Marantz
Matsui
Mitsubishi

Motorola
Myryad
NEC
Neckermann
NET-TV
Neufunk
Nokia
Oceanic
Onida

1162, 1171, 1172, 1024,1030
1161
1002, 1009, 1038
1175, 1003, 1052, 1053, 1056, 1057,
1063, 1081, 1067, 1106
1000, 1172, 1003, 1122, 1067, 1031
1161, 1172
1172, 1003, 1051, 1133, 1122, 1024,
1115
1069, 1014
1172
1029, 1003, 1043, 1024, 1069, 1012
1172
1137, 1150
1172
1161
1161
1029

1172
1045, 1047, 1050, 1060, 1065, 1028,
1029

Front panel

Display

Orion
Osaki
Otto Versand
Pacific
Panasonic

1172, 1020, 1096
1172
1172
1172
1165, 1067, 1069, 1111, 1017, 1095

Philips

1172, 1175, 1003, 1045, 1052, 1054,
1056, 1057, 1058, 1063, 1069, 1067,
1011

Philips Magnavox

1106, 1067

Pioneer

1003, 1018, 1070, 1071, 1037, 1094,
1145, 1147, 1149

Plasmsync
Portland
Price Club
Prism
Proscan

Q
R

Pro Vision
Proton
Pye
Quasar
Radiola
Radio Shack

1135
1003, 1059, 1024, 1013
1026
1018
1110, 1085, 1103, 1004, 1005, 1006,
1007, 1008
1172
1003, 1045
1172
1069, 1073, 1111, 1010, 1153
1172
1025, 1103, 1113, 1024

Radio Shack/Realistic 1003, 1045, 1023, 1110, 1025, 1015,
1100, 1013
1110, 1003, 1049, 1024, 1069, 1075,
1079, 1085, 1087, 1088, 1093, 1094,
RCA
1101, 1103, 1113, 1004, 1005, 1006,
1007, 1008, 1153, 1014

Rear panel

346

Remote

Realistic
Runco
Salora
Sampo
Samsung
Sansui
Sanyo
SBR
Schneider
Sharp

1025, 1103
1010, 1153
1161
1150
1163, 1164, 1172, 1003, 1045, 1024,
1062, 1026, 1078, 1083, 1090, 1100,
1013, 1105, 1040, 1146, 1148, 1120,
1121, 1114, 1157
1119
1161, 1166, 1003, 1051, 1025, 1072,
1077, 1091, 1156, 1157, 1158
1172
1172
1177, 1029, 1173, 1003, 1045, 1055,
1015, 1064, 1066, 1076, 1089, 1013,
1014, 1123

Siera
Signature

1172
1009

Sonitron
Sonolor
Sony
Soundesign
Starlite
Supersonic
Supre-Macy
Svasa

1161
1161
1174, 1001, 1102, 1108
1003, 1038, 1023, 1063, 1113
1023
1161
1134
1161
1003, 1042, 1052, 1053, 1063, 1056,
1057, 1067, 1089, 1151, 1039, 1089

Sylvania

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

TV group
Registrable input source button :

Symphonic
Tandy
Tatung
Technics
TechniSat
Technosonic

1044, 1023, 1039
1014
1069
1172, 1018
1172
1172

Tecnimagen
Techwood
Tedelex

1172
1003, 1018
1161
1003, 1009, 1038, 1045, 1047, 1063,
1023, 1059, 1024, 1026, 1111, 1013,
1113
1074
1172
1172
1172
1176, 1167, 1168, 1042, 1025, 1074,
1026, 1098, 1003, 1107, 1019, 1027,
1111, 1135, 1136
1013

Teknika
Telecaption
Telestar
Tesla
Tevion
Toshiba
Totevision

U
V

TRANS-continents
Triad
Triumph
TVTEXT
United
Universal
Video Concepts

Wards

1169, 1170
1003, 1009, 1044, 1038, 1046, 1052,
1054, 1056, 1110, 1057, 1024, 1015,
1067, 1086, 1103

White Westinghouse 1101, 1001
Wharfedale
Wilson
Windy Sam

Y
Z

Yamaha
Zenith

1172
1172
1172
1003, 1024
1171, 1010, 1003, 1009, 1144, 1153,
1032

1172
1172
1172
1172
1172
1046, 1054
1113
1130, 1128, 1006, 1131, 1129, 1109,
1143, 1150, 1022, 1138, 1145

Viewsonic

VIZIO

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

347

Remote

Index

Appendix

Connections

Contents

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

DVD group
Registrable input source button :

3D LAB
Aiwa

Alba
Aristona

B
C
D
D
F
G

Apex
Bluray
Bose
Brandt

2069
2036, 2037
2069
2069
2017, 2034, 2018, 2019, 2021, 2012
2064
2038, 2039, 2063

2004
California Audio Labs 2066
CyberHome
2068
Dantax
2069
Denon
2047, 2066, 2048
Elta
2068
Finlux
2010
Funai
GE
Go Video
GoldStar
GPX
Grundig
Harman Kardon

2049
2020, 2029, 2033, 2009
2010
2010
2010
2069
2061

Hanseatic
Hitachi
Integra
Insignia

2010
2031, 2012, 2008, 2031
2062
2010
2069, 2004, 2006, 2010, 2040, 2041,
2042, 2043

JVC

Front panel

Display

Kenwood
Koss

N
O
P

2066, 2054, 2053
2058
2010

Loewe
Lumatron
Lunatron

2069, 2010

Luxman
Magnavox
Marantz

2008
2069, 2004, 2023, 2025, 2011, 2007
2000, 2069, 2025, 2065
2044, 2010

Medion
Micromedia
Micromega
Mitsubishi
mp man
NAD
NEC
Omni

2010
2010

2069, 2004
2069
2011, 2015
2068
2010
2010
2068

Onkyo
Oritron

2030, 2009

Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer

2066, 2004, 2003, 2015, 2016, 2055
2069, 2004, 2007, 2011,2058
2002, 2014, 2056

Polk Audio
Pye
Proscan
Radionette

2069
2069
2020, 2032, 2009
2010

Rear panel

2062, 2004

348

Remote

U
W
Y
Z

RCA
REC
Rotel
Salora
Sampo
Samsung
Sanyo
Schneider
Sharp
Sherwood
Skantic
Silva Schneider
Sony
Sylvania
Targa
TCM
Technics
Teac
Tchibo
Toshiba

2020, 2005, 2009, 2035, 2057
2066
2040
2010
2041
2066, 2008, 2022, 2024, 2027, 2012
2050, 2052
2069
2044, 2045
2051, 2010
2069
2010
2067, 2001, 2013, 2059
2044
2010
2010
2066
2010
2010
2004, 2026, 2028, 2008

Typhoon

2068

Universum
Windy Sam
Yamaha
Zenith

2010
2008
2066, 2069, 2046, 2060
2010

Index

Connections

Contents

Playback

Settings

Tips

Blu-ray group
Registrable input source button :

D
H
I
J
L
M

Denon
Hitachi

N
O
P

NEC
Onkyo
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
RCA

R
S
T
X
Y

5034, 5042, 5035, 5036
5031, 5032, 5033

Integra

5013

JVC

5037, 5041, 5014, 5015, 5017, 5018,
5019, 5020

5041, 5010, 5011

Marantz
Microsoft
Mitsubishi

5000, 5026, 5027
5044

Samsung
Sharp
Sony
Toshiba
Xbox
Yamaha

5024, 5025
5041
5013
5041, 5001, 5002, 5003
5038, 5040, 5004
5005
5012
5039, 5006, 5005
5028, 5029, 5030
5007, 5008, 5009, 5016
5043, 5012
5044
5021, 5022, 5023

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

349

Remote

Index

Appendix

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

License
This section describes software license used for this unit.
To maintain the correct content, the original (English) is used.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies
or substantial portions of the Software.

o Boost
http://www.boost.org/
Boost Software License – Version 1.0 – August 17th, 2003
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or organization obtaining
a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license
(the “Software”) to use, reproduce, display, distribute, execute, and transmit the
Software, and to prepare derivative works of the Software, and to permit third-parties
to whom the Software is furnished to do so, all subject to the following:

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement, including the above
license grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer, must be included in all
copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and all derivative works of the Software,
unless such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of machine-executable
object code generated by a source language processor.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

o FastDelegate
http://www.codeproject.com/KB/cpp/FastDelegate.aspx
THE WORK (AS DEFINED BELOW) IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THIS
CODE PROJECT OPEN LICENSE (“LICENSE”). THE WORK IS PROTECTED BY
COPYRIGHT AND/OR OTHER APPLICABLE LAW. ANY USE OF THE WORK
OTHER THAN AS AUTHORIZED UNDER THIS LICENSE OR COPYRIGHT LAW IS
PROHIBITED.

o Expat

BY EXERCISING ANY RIGHTS TO THE WORK PROVIDED HEREIN, YOU
ACCEPT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. THE
AUTHOR GRANTS YOU THE RIGHTS CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONSIDERATION
OF YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF SUCH TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT
AGREE TO ACCEPT AND BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, YOU
CANNOT MAKE ANY USE OF THE WORK.

http://www.jclark.com/xml/expat.html
Expat License. Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center
Ltd

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

350

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Definitions. “Articles” means, collectively, all articles written by Author which
describes how the Source Code and Executable Files for the Work may be used by a
user.
“Author” means the individual or entity that offers the Work under the terms of this
License.
“Derivative Work” means a work based upon the Work or upon the Work and other
pre-existing works.
“Executable Files” refer to the executables, binary files, configuration and any
required data files included in the Work.
“Publisher” means the provider of the website, magazine, CD-ROM, DVD or other
medium from or by which the Work is obtained by You.
“Source Code” refers to the collection of source code and configuration files used to
create the Executable Files.
“Standard Version” refers to such a Work if it has not been modified, or has been
modified in accordance with the consent of the Author, such consent being in the full
discretion of the Author.
“Work” refers to the collection of files distributed by the Publisher, including the
Source Code, Executable Files, binaries, data files, documentation, whitepapers and
the Articles.
“You” is you, an individual or entity wishing to use the Work and exercise your rights
under this License.

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

You may otherwise modify Your copy of this Work (excluding the Articles) in any way
to create a Derivative Work, provided that You insert a prominent notice in each
changed file stating how, when and where You changed that file.
You may distribute the standard version of the Executable Files and Source Code or
Derivative Work in aggregate with other (possibly commercial) programs as part of a
larger (possibly commercial) software distribution.
The Articles discussing the Work published in any form by the author may not be
distributed or republished without the Author’s consent. The author retains copyright
to any such Articles. You may use the Executable Files and Source Code pursuant to
this License but you may not repost or republish or otherwise distribute or make
available the Articles, without the prior written consent of the Author.
Any subroutines or modules supplied by You and linked into the Source Code or
Executable Files this Work shall not be considered part of this Work and will not be
subject to the terms of this License.
Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Author
hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free,
irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use,
import, and otherwise transfer the Work.
Restrictions. The license granted in Section 3 above is expressly made subject to
and limited by the following restrictions: You agree not to remove any of the original
copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices and associated disclaimers that
may appear in the Source Code or Executable Files.
You agree not to advertise or in any way imply that this Work is a product of Your
own.
The name of the Author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from the Work without the prior written consent of the Author.
You agree not to sell, lease, or rent any part of the Work. This does not restrict you
from including the Work or any part of the Work inside a larger software distribution
that itself is being sold. The Work by itself, though, cannot be sold, leased or rented.

Fair Use/Fair Use Rights. Nothing in this License is intended to reduce, limit, or
restrict any rights arising from fair use, fair dealing, first sale or other limitations on the
exclusive rights of the copyright owner under copyright law or other applicable laws.
License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, the Author hereby
grants You a worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive, perpetual (for the duration of the
applicable copyright) license to exercise the rights in the Work as stated below: You
may use the standard version of the Source Code or Executable Files in Your own
applications.
You may apply bug fixes, portability fixes and other modifications obtained from the
Public Domain or from the Author. A Work modified in such a way shall still be
considered the standard version and will be subject to this License.

Front panel

Tips

351

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

You may distribute the Executable Files and Source Code only under the terms of
this License, and You must include a copy of, or the Uniform Resource Identifier for,
this License with every copy of the Executable Files or Source Code You distribute
and ensure that anyone receiving such Executable Files and Source Code agrees
that the terms of this License apply to such Executable Files and/or Source Code.
You may not offer or impose any terms on the Work that alter or restrict the terms of
this License or the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted hereunder. You may not
sublicense the Work. You must keep intact all notices that refer to this License and to
the disclaimer of warranties. You may not distribute the Executable Files or Source
Code with any technological measures that control access or use of the Work in a
manner inconsistent with the terms of this License.
You agree not to use the Work for illegal, immoral or improper purposes, or on pages
containing illegal, immoral or improper material. The Work is subject to applicable
export laws. You agree to comply with all such laws and regulations that may apply to
the Work after Your receipt of the Work.

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically upon any
breach by You of any term of this License. Individuals or entities who have received
Derivative Works from You under this License, however, will not have their licenses
terminated provided such individuals or entities remain in full compliance with those
licenses. Sections 1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11 will survive any termination of this
License.
If You bring a copyright, trademark, patent or any other infringement claim against
any contributor over infringements You claim are made by the Work, your License
from such contributor to the Work ends automatically.
Subject to the above terms and conditions, this License is perpetual (for the duration
of the applicable copyright in the Work). Notwithstanding the above, the Author
reserves the right to release the Work under different license terms or to stop
distributing the Work at any time; provided, however that any such election will not
serve to withdraw this License (or any other license that has been, or is required to
be, granted under the terms of this License), and this License will continue in full
force and effect unless terminated as stated above.

Representations, Warranties and Disclaimer. THIS WORK IS PROVIDED “AS IS”,
“WHERE IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OR GUARANTEES. YOU, THE USER, ASSUME
ALL RISK IN ITS USE, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, PATENT
INFRINGEMENT, SUITABILITY, ETC. AUTHOR EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL
EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, MERCHANTABLE QUALITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR ANY WARRANTY OF TITLE OR NONINFRINGEMENT, OR THAT THE WORK (OR ANY PORTION THEREOF) IS
CORRECT, USEFUL, BUG-FREE OR FREE OF VIRUSES. YOU MUST PASS THIS
DISCLAIMER ON WHENEVER YOU DISTRIBUTE THE WORK OR DERIVATIVE
WORKS.
Indemnity. You agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Author and the
Publisher from and against any claims, suits, losses, damages, liabilities, costs, and
expenses (including reasonable legal or attorneys’ fees) resulting from or relating to
any use of the Work by You.
Limitation on Liability. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL THE AUTHOR OR THE PUBLISHER BE LIABLE TO YOU
ON ANY LEGAL THEORY FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS LICENSE OR THE
USE OF THE WORK OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF THE AUTHOR OR THE
PUBLISHER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Termination.

Front panel

Tips

Publisher. The parties hereby confirm that the Publisher shall not, under any
circumstances, be responsible for and shall not have any liability in respect of the
subject matter of this License. The Publisher makes no warranty whatsoever in
connection with the Work and shall not be liable to You or any party on any legal
theory for any damages whatsoever, including without limitation any general, special,
incidental or consequential damages arising in connection to this license. The
Publisher reserves the right to cease making the Work available to You at any time
without notice
Miscellaneous
This License shall be governed by the laws of the location of the head office of the
Author or if the Author is an individual, the laws of location of the principal place of
residence of the Author.
If any provision of this License is invalid or unenforceable under applicable law, it
shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms of this
License, and without further action by the parties to this License, such provision shall
be reformed to the minimum extent necessary to make such provision valid and
enforceable.

352

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

http://www.xiph.org/vorbis/
Copyright (c) 2002-2004 Xiph.org Foundation
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
0 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
0 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
0 Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.

o libogg
http://www.xiph.org/ogg/
Copyright (c) 2002, Xiph.org Foundation
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.

0 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
0 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
0 Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

o libvorbis

No term or provision of this License shall be deemed waived and no breach
consented to unless such waiver or consent shall be in writing and signed by the
party to be charged with such waiver or consent.
This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the
Work licensed herein. There are no understandings, agreements or representations
with respect to the Work not specified herein. The Author shall not be bound by any
additional provisions that may appear in any communication from You. This License
may not be modified without the mutual written agreement of the Author and You

Front panel

Tips

o Tremolo
http://wss.co.uk/pinknoise/tremolo
Copyright (C) 2002 – 2009 Xiph.org Foundation Changes Copyright (C) 2009 – 2010
Robin Watts for Pinknoise Productions Ltd
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

353

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Mersenne Twister
http://www.math.sci.hiroshima-u.ac.jp/~m-mat/MT/MT2002/CODES/mt19937ar.c
Copyright (C) 1997 – 2002, Makoto Matsumoto and Takuji Nishimura,
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
The names of its contributors may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

o Tremor
http://wiki.xiph.org/index.php/Tremor
Copyright (c) 2002, Xiph.org Foundation
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
0 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
0 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
0 Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.

Front panel

Tips

354

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

http://curl.haxx.se
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright (c) 1996 – 2011, Daniel Stenberg, .
All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES
OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

o zlib
http://www.zlib.net/
zlib.h -- interface of the “zlib” general purpose compression library version 1.2.3, July
18th, 2005

Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software
without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

Copyright (C) 1995 – 2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided “as-is”, without any express or implied warranty. In no event
will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.

o c-ares

Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including
commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the
following restrictions:

http://c-ares.haxx.se
Copyright 1998 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you
wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment
in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required.
Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original software.
This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation
for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright
notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission
notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not be used
in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific,
written prior permission. M.I.T. makes no representations about the suitability of this
software for any purpose. It is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty.

Jean-loup Gailly jloup@gzip.org, Mark Adler madler@alumni.caltech.edu

Display

Rear panel

Appendix

o cURL

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Front panel

Tips

355

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o License information for the software used in
the unit
About GPL (GNU-General Public License), LGPL (GNU Lesser
General Public License) License
This product uses GPL/LGPL software and software made by other
companies.
After you purchase this product, you may procure, modify or distribute
the source code of the GPL/LGPL software that is used in the product.
Marantz provides the source code based on the GPL and LPGL
licenses at the actual cost upon your request to our customer service
center.
However, note that we make no guarantees concerning the source
code.
Please also understand that we do not offer support for the contents of
the source code.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

356

Remote

Index

Appendix

D&M Holdings Inc.
3520 10354 00AM

357

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2014:06:27 14:50:13+09:00
Creator                         : Sanwa iTREX Workbench
Modify Date                     : 2014:06:27 16:01:12+09:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Creator Tool                    : Sanwa iTREX Workbench
Metadata Date                   : 2014:06:27 16:01:12+09:00
Producer                        : Antenna House PDF Output Library 2.6.0 (Windows (x64))
Trapped                         : False
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:f1fed1f9-efe8-4b03-b2fb-43fee30f04bb
Instance ID                     : uuid:47024063-5000-49d2-bf5e-a832b996d85a
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseNone
Page Count                      : 357

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Marantz SR7009 User Manual To The 65e3eb68 56b0 4a88 Bc89 1229547d892b

65e3eb68-56b0-4a88-b.. 65e3eb68-56b0-4a88-bc89-1229547d892b

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation